1 This is ld.info, produced by makeinfo version 4.8 from ld.texinfo. 2 3 START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY 4 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker. 5 END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY 6 7 This file documents the GNU linker LD (GNU Binutils) version 2.20. 8 9 Copyright (C) 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001, 10 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software 11 Foundation, Inc. 12 13 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document 14 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or 15 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no 16 Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover 17 Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU 18 Free Documentation License". 19 20 21 File: ld.info, Node: Top, Next: Overview, Up: (dir) 22 23 LD 24 ** 25 26 This file documents the GNU linker ld (GNU Binutils) version 2.20. 27 28 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free 29 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included 30 in the section entitled "GNU Free Documentation License". 31 32 * Menu: 33 34 * Overview:: Overview 35 * Invocation:: Invocation 36 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts 37 38 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features 39 40 * BFD:: BFD 41 42 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs 43 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files 44 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License 45 * LD Index:: LD Index 46 47 48 File: ld.info, Node: Overview, Next: Invocation, Prev: Top, Up: Top 49 50 1 Overview 51 ********** 52 53 `ld' combines a number of object and archive files, relocates their 54 data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in compiling 55 a program is to run `ld'. 56 57 `ld' accepts Linker Command Language files written in a superset of 58 AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax, to provide explicit and 59 total control over the linking process. 60 61 This version of `ld' uses the general purpose BFD libraries to 62 operate on object files. This allows `ld' to read, combine, and write 63 object files in many different formats--for example, COFF or `a.out'. 64 Different formats may be linked together to produce any available kind 65 of object file. *Note BFD::, for more information. 66 67 Aside from its flexibility, the GNU linker is more helpful than other 68 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon 69 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible, 70 `ld' continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors (or, in 71 some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error). 72 73 74 File: ld.info, Node: Invocation, Next: Scripts, Prev: Overview, Up: Top 75 76 2 Invocation 77 ************ 78 79 The GNU linker `ld' is meant to cover a broad range of situations, and 80 to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result, you 81 have many choices to control its behavior. 82 83 * Menu: 84 85 * Options:: Command Line Options 86 * Environment:: Environment Variables 87 88 89 File: ld.info, Node: Options, Next: Environment, Up: Invocation 90 91 2.1 Command Line Options 92 ======================== 93 94 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual 95 practice few of them are used in any particular context. For instance, 96 a frequent use of `ld' is to link standard Unix object files on a 97 standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to link a file 98 `hello.o': 99 100 ld -o OUTPUT /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc 101 102 This tells `ld' to produce a file called OUTPUT as the result of 103 linking the file `/lib/crt0.o' with `hello.o' and the library `libc.a', 104 which will come from the standard search directories. (See the 105 discussion of the `-l' option below.) 106 107 Some of the command-line options to `ld' may be specified at any 108 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such 109 as `-l' or `-T', cause the file to be read at the point at which the 110 option appears in the command line, relative to the object files and 111 other file options. Repeating non-file options with a different 112 argument will either have no further effect, or override prior 113 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that 114 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are 115 noted in the descriptions below. 116 117 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be 118 linked together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with 119 command-line options, except that an object file argument may not be 120 placed between an option and its argument. 121 122 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you 123 can specify other forms of binary input files using `-l', `-R', and the 124 script command language. If _no_ binary input files at all are 125 specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the 126 message `No input files'. 127 128 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will 129 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way 130 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default 131 linker script or the one specified by using `-T'). This feature 132 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object 133 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses 134 `INPUT' or `GROUP' to load other objects. Specifying a script in this 135 way merely augments the main linker script, with the extra commands 136 placed after the main script; use the `-T' option to replace the 137 default linker script entirely, but note the effect of the `INSERT' 138 command. *Note Scripts::. 139 140 For options whose names are a single letter, option arguments must 141 either follow the option letter without intervening whitespace, or be 142 given as separate arguments immediately following the option that 143 requires them. 144 145 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two 146 can precede the option name; for example, `-trace-symbol' and 147 `--trace-symbol' are equivalent. Note--there is one exception to this 148 rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can 149 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the 150 `-o' option. So for example `-omagic' sets the output file name to 151 `magic' whereas `--omagic' sets the NMAGIC flag on the output. 152 153 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from 154 the option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments 155 immediately following the option that requires them. For example, 156 `--trace-symbol foo' and `--trace-symbol=foo' are equivalent. Unique 157 abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are accepted. 158 159 Note--if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler 160 driver (e.g. `gcc') then all the linker command line options should be 161 prefixed by `-Wl,' (or whatever is appropriate for the particular 162 compiler driver) like this: 163 164 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group 165 166 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may 167 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion 168 may also arise when passing options that require values through a 169 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as a 170 separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker 171 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use 172 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as: 173 174 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map 175 176 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the 177 GNU linker: 178 179 `@FILE' 180 Read command-line options from FILE. The options read are 181 inserted in place of the original @FILE option. If FILE does not 182 exist, or cannot be read, then the option will be treated 183 literally, and not removed. 184 185 Options in FILE are separated by whitespace. A whitespace 186 character may be included in an option by surrounding the entire 187 option in either single or double quotes. Any character 188 (including a backslash) may be included by prefixing the character 189 to be included with a backslash. The FILE may itself contain 190 additional @FILE options; any such options will be processed 191 recursively. 192 193 `-a KEYWORD' 194 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The KEYWORD 195 argument must be one of the strings `archive', `shared', or 196 `default'. `-aarchive' is functionally equivalent to `-Bstatic', 197 and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent to 198 `-Bdynamic'. This option may be used any number of times. 199 200 `-A ARCHITECTURE' 201 `--architecture=ARCHITECTURE' 202 In the current release of `ld', this option is useful only for the 203 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that `ld' configuration, the 204 ARCHITECTURE argument identifies the particular architecture in 205 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the 206 archive-library search path. *Note `ld' and the Intel 960 family: 207 i960, for details. 208 209 Future releases of `ld' may support similar functionality for 210 other architecture families. 211 212 `-b INPUT-FORMAT' 213 `--format=INPUT-FORMAT' 214 `ld' may be configured to support more than one kind of object 215 file. If your `ld' is configured this way, you can use the `-b' 216 option to specify the binary format for input object files that 217 follow this option on the command line. Even when `ld' is 218 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't 219 usually need to specify this, as `ld' should be configured to 220 expect as a default input format the most usual format on each 221 machine. INPUT-FORMAT is a text string, the name of a particular 222 format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the 223 available binary formats with `objdump -i'.) *Note BFD::. 224 225 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an 226 unusual binary format. You can also use `-b' to switch formats 227 explicitly (when linking object files of different formats), by 228 including `-b INPUT-FORMAT' before each group of object files in a 229 particular format. 230 231 The default format is taken from the environment variable 232 `GNUTARGET'. *Note Environment::. You can also define the input 233 format from a script, using the command `TARGET'; see *Note Format 234 Commands::. 235 236 `-c MRI-COMMANDFILE' 237 `--mri-script=MRI-COMMANDFILE' 238 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, `ld' accepts script 239 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, 240 described in *Note MRI Compatible Script Files: MRI. Introduce 241 MRI script files with the option `-c'; use the `-T' option to run 242 linker scripts written in the general-purpose `ld' scripting 243 language. If MRI-CMDFILE does not exist, `ld' looks for it in the 244 directories specified by any `-L' options. 245 246 `-d' 247 `-dc' 248 `-dp' 249 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported 250 for compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common 251 symbols even if a relocatable output file is specified (with 252 `-r'). The script command `FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION' has the same 253 effect. *Note Miscellaneous Commands::. 254 255 `-e ENTRY' 256 `--entry=ENTRY' 257 Use ENTRY as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your 258 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no 259 symbol named ENTRY, the linker will try to parse ENTRY as a number, 260 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted 261 in base 10; you may use a leading `0x' for base 16, or a leading 262 `0' for base 8). *Note Entry Point::, for a discussion of defaults 263 and other ways of specifying the entry point. 264 265 `--exclude-libs LIB,LIB,...' 266 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should 267 not be automatically exported. The library names may be delimited 268 by commas or colons. Specifying `--exclude-libs ALL' excludes 269 symbols in all archive libraries from automatic export. This 270 option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port of the 271 linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols 272 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of 273 this option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this 274 option will be treated as hidden. 275 276 `--exclude-modules-for-implib MODULE,MODULE,...' 277 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which 278 symbols should not be automatically exported, but which should be 279 copied wholesale into the import library being generated during 280 the link. The module names may be delimited by commas or colons, 281 and must match exactly the filenames used by `ld' to open the 282 files; for archive members, this is simply the member name, but 283 for object files the name listed must include and match precisely 284 any path used to specify the input file on the linker's 285 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE 286 targeted port of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def 287 file are still exported, regardless of this option. 288 289 `-E' 290 `--export-dynamic' 291 `--no-export-dynamic' 292 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the `-E' 293 option or the `--export-dynamic' option causes the linker to add 294 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table 295 is the set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at 296 run time. 297 298 If you do not use either of these options (or use the 299 `--no-export-dynamic' option to restore the default behavior), the 300 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols 301 which are referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link. 302 303 If you use `dlopen' to load a dynamic object which needs to refer 304 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other 305 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when 306 linking the program itself. 307 308 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should 309 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports 310 it. See the description of `--dynamic-list'. 311 312 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE 313 targets support a similar function to export all symbols from a 314 DLL or EXE; see the description of `--export-all-symbols' below. 315 316 `-EB' 317 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format. 318 319 `-EL' 320 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output 321 format. 322 323 `-f NAME' 324 `--auxiliary=NAME' 325 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY 326 field to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that 327 the symbol table of the shared object should be used as an 328 auxiliary filter on the symbol table of the shared object NAME. 329 330 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when 331 you run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY 332 field. If the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter 333 object, it will first check whether there is a definition in the 334 shared object NAME. If there is one, it will be used instead of 335 the definition in the filter object. The shared object NAME need 336 not exist. Thus the shared object NAME may be used to provide an 337 alternative implementation of certain functions, perhaps for 338 debugging or for machine specific performance. 339 340 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY 341 entries will be created in the order in which they appear on the 342 command line. 343 344 `-F NAME' 345 `--filter=NAME' 346 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER 347 field to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that 348 the symbol table of the shared object which is being created 349 should be used as a filter on the symbol table of the shared 350 object NAME. 351 352 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when 353 you run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER 354 field. The dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the 355 symbol table of the filter object as usual, but it will actually 356 link to the definitions found in the shared object NAME. Thus the 357 filter object can be used to select a subset of the symbols 358 provided by the object NAME. 359 360 Some older linkers used the `-F' option throughout a compilation 361 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and 362 output object files. The GNU linker uses other mechanisms for 363 this purpose: the `-b', `--format', `--oformat' options, the 364 `TARGET' command in linker scripts, and the `GNUTARGET' 365 environment variable. The GNU linker will ignore the `-F' option 366 when not creating an ELF shared object. 367 368 `-fini=NAME' 369 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when 370 the executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to 371 the address of the function. By default, the linker uses `_fini' 372 as the function to call. 373 374 `-g' 375 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools. 376 377 `-G VALUE' 378 `--gpsize=VALUE' 379 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP 380 register to SIZE. This is only meaningful for object file formats 381 such as MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects 382 into different sections. This is ignored for other object file 383 formats. 384 385 `-h NAME' 386 `-soname=NAME' 387 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME 388 field to the specified name. When an executable is linked with a 389 shared object which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the 390 executable is run the dynamic linker will attempt to load the 391 shared object specified by the DT_SONAME field rather than the 392 using the file name given to the linker. 393 394 `-i' 395 Perform an incremental link (same as option `-r'). 396 397 `-init=NAME' 398 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when 399 the executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to 400 the address of the function. By default, the linker uses `_init' 401 as the function to call. 402 403 `-l NAMESPEC' 404 `--library=NAMESPEC' 405 Add the archive or object file specified by NAMESPEC to the list 406 of files to link. This option may be used any number of times. 407 If NAMESPEC is of the form `:FILENAME', `ld' will search the 408 library path for a file called FILENAME, otherwise it will search 409 the library path for a file called `libNAMESPEC.a'. 410 411 On systems which support shared libraries, `ld' may also search for 412 files other than `libNAMESPEC.a'. Specifically, on ELF and SunOS 413 systems, `ld' will search a directory for a library called 414 `libNAMESPEC.so' before searching for one called `libNAMESPEC.a'. 415 (By convention, a `.so' extension indicates a shared library.) 416 Note that this behavior does not apply to `:FILENAME', which 417 always specifies a file called FILENAME. 418 419 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where 420 it is specified on the command line. If the archive defines a 421 symbol which was undefined in some object which appeared before 422 the archive on the command line, the linker will include the 423 appropriate file(s) from the archive. However, an undefined 424 symbol in an object appearing later on the command line will not 425 cause the linker to search the archive again. 426 427 See the `-(' option for a way to force the linker to search 428 archives multiple times. 429 430 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line. 431 432 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. 433 However, if you are using `ld' on AIX, note that it is different 434 from the behaviour of the AIX linker. 435 436 `-L SEARCHDIR' 437 `--library-path=SEARCHDIR' 438 Add path SEARCHDIR to the list of paths that `ld' will search for 439 archive libraries and `ld' control scripts. You may use this 440 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the 441 order in which they are specified on the command line. 442 Directories specified on the command line are searched before the 443 default directories. All `-L' options apply to all `-l' options, 444 regardless of the order in which the options appear. `-L' options 445 do not affect how `ld' searches for a linker script unless `-T' 446 option is specified. 447 448 If SEARCHDIR begins with `=', then the `=' will be replaced by the 449 "sysroot prefix", a path specified when the linker is configured. 450 451 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with 452 `-L') depends on which emulation mode `ld' is using, and in some 453 cases also on how it was configured. *Note Environment::. 454 455 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the 456 `SEARCH_DIR' command. Directories specified this way are searched 457 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command 458 line. 459 460 `-m EMULATION' 461 Emulate the EMULATION linker. You can list the available 462 emulations with the `--verbose' or `-V' options. 463 464 If the `-m' option is not used, the emulation is taken from the 465 `LDEMULATION' environment variable, if that is defined. 466 467 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was 468 configured. 469 470 `-M' 471 `--print-map' 472 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides 473 information about the link, including the following: 474 475 * Where object files are mapped into memory. 476 477 * How common symbols are allocated. 478 479 * All archive members included in the link, with a mention of 480 the symbol which caused the archive member to be brought in. 481 482 * The values assigned to symbols. 483 484 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression 485 which involves a reference to a previous value of the same 486 symbol may not have correct result displayed in the link map. 487 This is because the linker discards intermediate results and 488 only retains the final value of an expression. Under such 489 circumstances the linker will display the final value 490 enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a linker 491 script containing: 492 493 foo = 1 494 foo = foo * 4 495 foo = foo + 8 496 497 will produce the following output in the link map if the `-M' 498 option is used: 499 500 0x00000001 foo = 0x1 501 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4) 502 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8) 503 504 See *Note Expressions:: for more information about 505 expressions in linker scripts. 506 507 `-n' 508 `--nmagic' 509 Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as 510 `NMAGIC' if possible. 511 512 `-N' 513 `--omagic' 514 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, 515 do not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against 516 shared libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic 517 numbers, mark the output as `OMAGIC'. Note: Although a writable 518 text section is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform 519 to the format specification published by Microsoft. 520 521 `--no-omagic' 522 This option negates most of the effects of the `-N' option. It 523 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment 524 to be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking 525 against shared libraries. Use `-Bdynamic' for this. 526 527 `-o OUTPUT' 528 `--output=OUTPUT' 529 Use OUTPUT as the name for the program produced by `ld'; if this 530 option is not specified, the name `a.out' is used by default. The 531 script command `OUTPUT' can also specify the output file name. 532 533 `-O LEVEL' 534 If LEVEL is a numeric values greater than zero `ld' optimizes the 535 output. This might take significantly longer and therefore 536 probably should only be enabled for the final binary. At the 537 moment this option only affects ELF shared library generation. 538 Future releases of the linker may make more use of this option. 539 Also currently there is no difference in the linker's behaviour 540 for different non-zero values of this option. Again this may 541 change with future releases. 542 543 `-q' 544 `--emit-relocs' 545 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables. 546 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this 547 information in order to perform correct modifications of 548 executables. This results in larger executables. 549 550 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms. 551 552 `--force-dynamic' 553 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is 554 specific to VxWorks targets. 555 556 `-r' 557 `--relocatable' 558 Generate relocatable output--i.e., generate an output file that 559 can in turn serve as input to `ld'. This is often called "partial 560 linking". As a side effect, in environments that support standard 561 Unix magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic 562 number to `OMAGIC'. If this option is not specified, an absolute 563 file is produced. When linking C++ programs, this option _will 564 not_ resolve references to constructors; to do that, use `-Ur'. 565 566 When an input file does not have the same format as the output 567 file, partial linking is only supported if that input file does 568 not contain any relocations. Different output formats can have 569 further restrictions; for example some `a.out'-based formats do 570 not support partial linking with input files in other formats at 571 all. 572 573 This option does the same thing as `-i'. 574 575 `-R FILENAME' 576 `--just-symbols=FILENAME' 577 Read symbol names and their addresses from FILENAME, but do not 578 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output 579 file to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined 580 in other programs. You may use this option more than once. 581 582 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the `-R' option is 583 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is 584 treated as the `-rpath' option. 585 586 `-s' 587 `--strip-all' 588 Omit all symbol information from the output file. 589 590 `-S' 591 `--strip-debug' 592 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the 593 output file. 594 595 `-t' 596 `--trace' 597 Print the names of the input files as `ld' processes them. 598 599 `-T SCRIPTFILE' 600 `--script=SCRIPTFILE' 601 Use SCRIPTFILE as the linker script. This script replaces `ld''s 602 default linker script (rather than adding to it), so COMMANDFILE 603 must specify everything necessary to describe the output file. 604 *Note Scripts::. If SCRIPTFILE does not exist in the current 605 directory, `ld' looks for it in the directories specified by any 606 preceding `-L' options. Multiple `-T' options accumulate. 607 608 `-dT SCRIPTFILE' 609 `--default-script=SCRIPTFILE' 610 Use SCRIPTFILE as the default linker script. *Note Scripts::. 611 612 This option is similar to the `--script' option except that 613 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the 614 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after 615 the `--default-script' option on the command line to affect the 616 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the 617 linker command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. 618 (eg because the command line is being constructed by another tool, 619 such as `gcc'). 620 621 `-u SYMBOL' 622 `--undefined=SYMBOL' 623 Force SYMBOL to be entered in the output file as an undefined 624 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional 625 modules from standard libraries. `-u' may be repeated with 626 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. 627 This option is equivalent to the `EXTERN' linker script command. 628 629 `-Ur' 630 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to 631 `-r': it generates relocatable output--i.e., an output file that 632 can in turn serve as input to `ld'. When linking C++ programs, 633 `-Ur' _does_ resolve references to constructors, unlike `-r'. It 634 does not work to use `-Ur' on files that were themselves linked 635 with `-Ur'; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot 636 be added to. Use `-Ur' only for the last partial link, and `-r' 637 for the others. 638 639 `--unique[=SECTION]' 640 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching 641 SECTION, or if the optional wildcard SECTION argument is missing, 642 for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not 643 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option 644 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal 645 merging of input sections with the same name, overriding output 646 section assignments in a linker script. 647 648 `-v' 649 `--version' 650 `-V' 651 Display the version number for `ld'. The `-V' option also lists 652 the supported emulations. 653 654 `-x' 655 `--discard-all' 656 Delete all local symbols. 657 658 `-X' 659 `--discard-locals' 660 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with 661 system-specific local label prefixes, typically `.L' for ELF 662 systems or `L' for traditional a.out systems.) 663 664 `-y SYMBOL' 665 `--trace-symbol=SYMBOL' 666 Print the name of each linked file in which SYMBOL appears. This 667 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is 668 necessary to prepend an underscore. 669 670 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your 671 link but don't know where the reference is coming from. 672 673 `-Y PATH' 674 Add PATH to the default library search path. This option exists 675 for Solaris compatibility. 676 677 `-z KEYWORD' 678 The recognized keywords are: 679 `combreloc' 680 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make 681 dynamic symbol lookup caching possible. 682 683 `defs' 684 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined 685 symbols in shared libraries are still allowed. 686 687 `execstack' 688 Marks the object as requiring executable stack. 689 690 `initfirst' 691 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. 692 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will 693 occur before the runtime initialization of any other objects 694 brought into the process at the same time. Similarly the 695 runtime finalization of the object will occur after the 696 runtime finalization of any other objects. 697 698 `interpose' 699 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all 700 symbols but the primary executable. 701 702 `lazy' 703 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to 704 tell the dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to 705 the point when the function is called (lazy binding), rather 706 than at load time. Lazy binding is the default. 707 708 `loadfltr' 709 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at 710 runtime. 711 712 `muldefs' 713 Allows multiple definitions. 714 715 `nocombreloc' 716 Disables multiple reloc sections combining. 717 718 `nocopyreloc' 719 Disables production of copy relocs. 720 721 `nodefaultlib' 722 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this 723 object will ignore any default library search paths. 724 725 `nodelete' 726 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime. 727 728 `nodlopen' 729 Marks the object not available to `dlopen'. 730 731 `nodump' 732 Marks the object can not be dumped by `dldump'. 733 734 `noexecstack' 735 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack. 736 737 `norelro' 738 Don't create an ELF `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment header in the 739 object. 740 741 `now' 742 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to 743 tell the dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the 744 program is started, or when the shared library is linked to 745 using dlopen, instead of deferring function call resolution 746 to the point when the function is first called. 747 748 `origin' 749 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN. 750 751 `relro' 752 Create an ELF `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment header in the object. 753 754 `max-page-size=VALUE' 755 Set the emulation maximum page size to VALUE. 756 757 `common-page-size=VALUE' 758 Set the emulation common page size to VALUE. 759 760 761 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility. 762 763 `-( ARCHIVES -)' 764 `--start-group ARCHIVES --end-group' 765 The ARCHIVES should be a list of archive files. They may be 766 either explicit file names, or `-l' options. 767 768 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new 769 undefined references are created. Normally, an archive is 770 searched only once in the order that it is specified on the 771 command line. If a symbol in that archive is needed to resolve an 772 undefined symbol referred to by an object in an archive that 773 appears later on the command line, the linker would not be able to 774 resolve that reference. By grouping the archives, they all be 775 searched repeatedly until all possible references are resolved. 776 777 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best 778 to use it only when there are unavoidable circular references 779 between two or more archives. 780 781 `--accept-unknown-input-arch' 782 `--no-accept-unknown-input-arch' 783 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be 784 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are 785 doing and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. 786 This was the default behaviour of the linker, before release 787 2.14. The default behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to 788 reject such input files, and so the `--accept-unknown-input-arch' 789 option has been added to restore the old behaviour. 790 791 `--as-needed' 792 `--no-as-needed' 793 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries 794 mentioned on the command line after the `--as-needed' option. 795 Normally, the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic 796 library mentioned on the command line, regardless of whether the 797 library is actually needed. `--as-needed' causes a DT_NEEDED tag 798 to only be emitted for a library that satisfies a symbol reference 799 from regular objects which is undefined at the point that the 800 library was linked, or, if the library is not found in the 801 DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries linked up to that point, a 802 reference from another dynamic library. `--no-as-needed' restores 803 the default behaviour. 804 805 `--add-needed' 806 `--no-add-needed' 807 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries from ELF 808 DT_NEEDED tags in dynamic libraries mentioned on the command line 809 after the `--no-add-needed' option. Normally, the linker will add 810 a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library from DT_NEEDED tags. 811 `--no-add-needed' causes DT_NEEDED tags will never be emitted for 812 those libraries from DT_NEEDED tags. `--add-needed' restores the 813 default behaviour. 814 815 `-assert KEYWORD' 816 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility. 817 818 `-Bdynamic' 819 `-dy' 820 `-call_shared' 821 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on 822 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. This option 823 is normally the default on such platforms. The different variants 824 of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You 825 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects 826 library searching for `-l' options which follow it. 827 828 `-Bgroup' 829 Set the `DF_1_GROUP' flag in the `DT_FLAGS_1' entry in the dynamic 830 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this 831 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group. 832 `--unresolved-symbols=report-all' is implied. This option is only 833 meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries. 834 835 `-Bstatic' 836 `-dn' 837 `-non_shared' 838 `-static' 839 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on 840 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different 841 variants of this option are for compatibility with various 842 systems. You may use this option multiple times on the command 843 line: it affects library searching for `-l' options which follow 844 it. This option also implies `--unresolved-symbols=report-all'. 845 This option can be used with `-shared'. Doing so means that a 846 shared library is being created but that all of the library's 847 external references must be resolved by pulling in entries from 848 static libraries. 849 850 `-Bsymbolic' 851 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols 852 to the definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it 853 is possible for a program linked against a shared library to 854 override the definition within the shared library. This option is 855 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries. 856 857 `-Bsymbolic-functions' 858 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function 859 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any. This 860 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared 861 libraries. 862 863 `--dynamic-list=DYNAMIC-LIST-FILE' 864 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is 865 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of 866 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the 867 definition within the shared library, or creating dynamically 868 linked executables to specify a list of symbols which should be 869 added to the symbol table in the executable. This option is only 870 meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries. 871 872 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node 873 without scope and node name. See *Note VERSION:: for more 874 information. 875 876 `--dynamic-list-data' 877 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list. 878 879 `--dynamic-list-cpp-new' 880 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. 881 It is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++. 882 883 `--dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo' 884 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type 885 identification. 886 887 `--check-sections' 888 `--no-check-sections' 889 Asks the linker _not_ to check section addresses after they have 890 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the 891 linker will perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it 892 will produce suitable error messages. The linker does know about, 893 and does make allowances for sections in overlays. The default 894 behaviour can be restored by using the command line switch 895 `--check-sections'. Section overlap is not usually checked for 896 relocatable links. You can force checking in that case by using 897 the `--check-sections' option. 898 899 `--cref' 900 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being 901 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file. 902 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output. 903 904 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be 905 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are 906 printed out, sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file 907 names is given. If the symbol is defined, the first file listed 908 is the location of the definition. The remaining files contain 909 references to the symbol. 910 911 `--no-define-common' 912 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols. 913 The script command `INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION' has the same effect. 914 *Note Miscellaneous Commands::. 915 916 The `--no-define-common' option allows decoupling the decision to 917 assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice of the output 918 file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type forces 919 assigning addresses to Common symbols. Using `--no-define-common' 920 allows Common symbols that are referenced from a shared library to 921 be assigned addresses only in the main program. This eliminates 922 the unused duplicate space in the shared library, and also 923 prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong 924 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized 925 search paths for runtime symbol resolution. 926 927 `--defsym=SYMBOL=EXPRESSION' 928 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute 929 address given by EXPRESSION. You may use this option as many 930 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. 931 A limited form of arithmetic is supported for the EXPRESSION in 932 this context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of 933 an existing symbol, or use `+' and `-' to add or subtract 934 hexadecimal constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate 935 expressions, consider using the linker command language from a 936 script (*note Assignment: Symbol Definitions: Assignments.). 937 _Note:_ there should be no white space between SYMBOL, the equals 938 sign ("<=>"), and EXPRESSION. 939 940 `--demangle[=STYLE]' 941 `--no-demangle' 942 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error 943 messages and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, 944 it tries to present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips 945 leading underscores if they are used by the object file format, 946 and converts C++ mangled symbol names into user readable names. 947 Different compilers have different mangling styles. The optional 948 demangling style argument can be used to choose an appropriate 949 demangling style for your compiler. The linker will demangle by 950 default unless the environment variable `COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE' is 951 set. These options may be used to override the default. 952 953 `-IFILE' 954 `--dynamic-linker=FILE' 955 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when 956 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic 957 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what 958 you are doing. 959 960 `--fatal-warnings' 961 `--no-fatal-warnings' 962 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be 963 restored with the option `--no-fatal-warnings'. 964 965 `--force-exe-suffix' 966 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix. 967 968 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a 969 `.exe' or `.dll' suffix, this option forces the linker to copy the 970 output file to one of the same name with a `.exe' suffix. This 971 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a 972 Microsoft Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run 973 an image unless it ends in a `.exe' suffix. 974 975 `--gc-sections' 976 `--no-gc-sections' 977 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored 978 on targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour 979 (of not performing this garbage collection) can be restored by 980 specifying `--no-gc-sections' on the command line. 981 982 `--gc-sections' decides which input sections are used by examining 983 symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry symbol 984 and all sections containing symbols undefined on the command-line 985 will be kept, as will sections containing symbols referenced by 986 dynamic objects. Note that when building shared libraries, the 987 linker must assume that any visible symbol is referenced. Once 988 this initial set of sections has been determined, the linker 989 recursively marks as used any section referenced by their 990 relocations. See `--entry' and `--undefined'. 991 992 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with 993 option `-r'). In this case the root of symbols kept must be 994 explicitely specified either by an `--entry' or `--undefined' 995 option or by a `ENTRY' command in the linker script. 996 997 `--print-gc-sections' 998 `--no-print-gc-sections' 999 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is 1000 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage 1001 collection has been enabled via the `--gc-sections') option. The 1002 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) 1003 can be restored by specifying `--no-print-gc-sections' on the 1004 command line. 1005 1006 `--help' 1007 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output 1008 and exit. 1009 1010 `--target-help' 1011 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard 1012 output and exit. 1013 1014 `-Map=MAPFILE' 1015 Print a link map to the file MAPFILE. See the description of the 1016 `-M' option, above. 1017 1018 `--no-keep-memory' 1019 `ld' normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the 1020 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells `ld' to 1021 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables 1022 as necessary. This may be required if `ld' runs out of memory 1023 space while linking a large executable. 1024 1025 `--no-undefined' 1026 `-z defs' 1027 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. 1028 This is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared 1029 library. The switch `--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined' controls the 1030 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared 1031 libraries being linked in. 1032 1033 `--allow-multiple-definition' 1034 `-z muldefs' 1035 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will 1036 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and 1037 the first definition will be used. 1038 1039 `--allow-shlib-undefined' 1040 `--no-allow-shlib-undefined' 1041 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries. This 1042 switch is similar to `--no-undefined' except that it determines 1043 the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a shared library 1044 rather than a regular object file. It does not affect how 1045 undefined symbols in regular object files are handled. 1046 1047 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols 1048 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to 1049 create an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being 1050 used to create a shared library. 1051 1052 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared 1053 libraries specified at link time are that: 1054 1055 * A shared library specified at link time may not be the same 1056 as the one that is available at load time, so the symbol 1057 might actually be resolvable at load time. 1058 1059 * There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where 1060 undefined symbols in shared libraries are normal. 1061 1062 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load 1063 time to select whichever function is most appropriate for the 1064 current architecture. This is used, for example, to 1065 dynamically select an appropriate memset function. 1066 1067 `--no-undefined-version' 1068 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will 1069 ignore it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version 1070 and a fatal error will be issued instead. 1071 1072 `--default-symver' 1073 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for 1074 unversioned exported symbols. 1075 1076 `--default-imported-symver' 1077 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for 1078 unversioned imported symbols. 1079 1080 `--no-warn-mismatch' 1081 Normally `ld' will give an error if you try to link together input 1082 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they 1083 have been compiled for different processors or for different 1084 endiannesses. This option tells `ld' that it should silently 1085 permit such possible errors. This option should only be used with 1086 care, in cases when you have taken some special action that 1087 ensures that the linker errors are inappropriate. 1088 1089 `--no-warn-search-mismatch' 1090 Normally `ld' will give a warning if it finds an incompatible 1091 library during a library search. This option silences the warning. 1092 1093 `--no-whole-archive' 1094 Turn off the effect of the `--whole-archive' option for subsequent 1095 archive files. 1096 1097 `--noinhibit-exec' 1098 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable. 1099 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it 1100 encounters errors during the link process; it exits without 1101 writing an output file when it issues any error whatsoever. 1102 1103 `-nostdlib' 1104 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the 1105 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts 1106 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are 1107 ignored. 1108 1109 `--oformat=OUTPUT-FORMAT' 1110 `ld' may be configured to support more than one kind of object 1111 file. If your `ld' is configured this way, you can use the 1112 `--oformat' option to specify the binary format for the output 1113 object file. Even when `ld' is configured to support alternative 1114 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as `ld' 1115 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most 1116 usual format on each machine. OUTPUT-FORMAT is a text string, the 1117 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You 1118 can list the available binary formats with `objdump -i'.) The 1119 script command `OUTPUT_FORMAT' can also specify the output format, 1120 but this option overrides it. *Note BFD::. 1121 1122 `-pie' 1123 `--pic-executable' 1124 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only 1125 supported on ELF platforms. Position independent executables are 1126 similar to shared libraries in that they are relocated by the 1127 dynamic linker to the virtual address the OS chooses for them 1128 (which can vary between invocations). Like normal dynamically 1129 linked executables they can be executed and symbols defined in the 1130 executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries. 1131 1132 `-qmagic' 1133 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility. 1134 1135 `-Qy' 1136 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility. 1137 1138 `--relax' 1139 An option with machine dependent effects. This option is only 1140 supported on a few targets. *Note `ld' and the H8/300: H8/300. 1141 *Note `ld' and the Intel 960 family: i960. *Note `ld' and Xtensa 1142 Processors: Xtensa. *Note `ld' and the 68HC11 and 68HC12: 1143 M68HC11/68HC12. *Note `ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support: 1144 PowerPC ELF32. 1145 1146 On some platforms, the `--relax' option performs global 1147 optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves 1148 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes and 1149 synthesizing new instructions in the output object file. 1150 1151 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make 1152 symbolic debugging of the resulting executable impossible. This 1153 is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300 1154 family of processors. 1155 1156 On platforms where this is not supported, `--relax' is accepted, 1157 but ignored. 1158 1159 `--retain-symbols-file=FILENAME' 1160 Retain _only_ the symbols listed in the file FILENAME, discarding 1161 all others. FILENAME is simply a flat file, with one symbol name 1162 per line. This option is especially useful in environments (such 1163 as VxWorks) where a large global symbol table is accumulated 1164 gradually, to conserve run-time memory. 1165 1166 `--retain-symbols-file' does _not_ discard undefined symbols, or 1167 symbols needed for relocations. 1168 1169 You may only specify `--retain-symbols-file' once in the command 1170 line. It overrides `-s' and `-S'. 1171 1172 `-rpath=DIR' 1173 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used 1174 when linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All `-rpath' 1175 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which 1176 uses them to locate shared objects at runtime. The `-rpath' 1177 option is also used when locating shared objects which are needed 1178 by shared objects explicitly included in the link; see the 1179 description of the `-rpath-link' option. If `-rpath' is not used 1180 when linking an ELF executable, the contents of the environment 1181 variable `LD_RUN_PATH' will be used if it is defined. 1182 1183 The `-rpath' option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on 1184 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the 1185 `-L' options it is given. If a `-rpath' option is used, the 1186 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the `-rpath' 1187 options, ignoring the `-L' options. This can be useful when using 1188 gcc, which adds many `-L' options which may be on NFS mounted file 1189 systems. 1190 1191 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the `-R' option is 1192 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is 1193 treated as the `-rpath' option. 1194 1195 `-rpath-link=DIR' 1196 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. 1197 This happens when an `ld -shared' link includes a shared library 1198 as one of the input files. 1199 1200 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a 1201 non-shared, non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to 1202 locate the required shared library and include it in the link, if 1203 it is not included explicitly. In such a case, the `-rpath-link' 1204 option specifies the first set of directories to search. The 1205 `-rpath-link' option may specify a sequence of directory names 1206 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by 1207 appearing multiple times. 1208 1209 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search 1210 path that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In 1211 such a case it is possible to use unintentionally a different 1212 search path than the runtime linker would do. 1213 1214 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required 1215 shared libraries: 1216 1. Any directories specified by `-rpath-link' options. 1217 1218 2. Any directories specified by `-rpath' options. The difference 1219 between `-rpath' and `-rpath-link' is that directories 1220 specified by `-rpath' options are included in the executable 1221 and used at runtime, whereas the `-rpath-link' option is only 1222 effective at link time. Searching `-rpath' in this way is 1223 only supported by native linkers and cross linkers which have 1224 been configured with the `--with-sysroot' option. 1225 1226 3. On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the `-rpath' and 1227 `-rpath-link' options were not used, search the contents of 1228 the environment variable `LD_RUN_PATH'. 1229 1230 4. On SunOS, if the `-rpath' option was not used, search any 1231 directories specified using `-L' options. 1232 1233 5. For a native linker, the search the contents of the 1234 environment variable `LD_LIBRARY_PATH'. 1235 1236 6. For a native ELF linker, the directories in `DT_RUNPATH' or 1237 `DT_RPATH' of a shared library are searched for shared 1238 libraries needed by it. The `DT_RPATH' entries are ignored if 1239 `DT_RUNPATH' entries exist. 1240 1241 7. The default directories, normally `/lib' and `/usr/lib'. 1242 1243 8. For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file 1244 `/etc/ld.so.conf' exists, the list of directories found in 1245 that file. 1246 1247 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue 1248 a warning and continue with the link. 1249 1250 `-shared' 1251 `-Bshareable' 1252 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, 1253 XCOFF and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will 1254 automatically create a shared library if the `-e' option is not 1255 used and there are undefined symbols in the link. 1256 1257 `--sort-common' 1258 `--sort-common=ascending' 1259 `--sort-common=descending' 1260 This option tells `ld' to sort the common symbols by alignment in 1261 ascending or descending order when it places them in the 1262 appropriate output sections. The symbol alignments considered are 1263 sixteen-byte or larger, eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and 1264 one-byte. This is to prevent gaps between symbols due to alignment 1265 constraints. If no sorting order is specified, then descending 1266 order is assumed. 1267 1268 `--sort-section=name' 1269 This option will apply `SORT_BY_NAME' to all wildcard section 1270 patterns in the linker script. 1271 1272 `--sort-section=alignment' 1273 This option will apply `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' to all wildcard section 1274 patterns in the linker script. 1275 1276 `--split-by-file[=SIZE]' 1277 Similar to `--split-by-reloc' but creates a new output section for 1278 each input file when SIZE is reached. SIZE defaults to a size of 1279 1 if not given. 1280 1281 `--split-by-reloc[=COUNT]' 1282 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no 1283 single output section in the file contains more than COUNT 1284 relocations. This is useful when generating huge relocatable 1285 files for downloading into certain real time kernels with the COFF 1286 object file format; since COFF cannot represent more than 65535 1287 relocations in a single section. Note that this will fail to work 1288 with object file formats which do not support arbitrary sections. 1289 The linker will not split up individual input sections for 1290 redistribution, so if a single input section contains more than 1291 COUNT relocations one output section will contain that many 1292 relocations. COUNT defaults to a value of 32768. 1293 1294 `--stats' 1295 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, 1296 such as execution time and memory usage. 1297 1298 `--sysroot=DIRECTORY' 1299 Use DIRECTORY as the location of the sysroot, overriding the 1300 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers 1301 that were configured using `--with-sysroot'. 1302 1303 `--traditional-format' 1304 For some targets, the output of `ld' is different in some ways from 1305 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests `ld' to 1306 use the traditional format instead. 1307 1308 For example, on SunOS, `ld' combines duplicate entries in the 1309 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file 1310 with full debugging information by over 30 percent. 1311 Unfortunately, the SunOS `dbx' program can not read the resulting 1312 program (`gdb' has no trouble). The `--traditional-format' switch 1313 tells `ld' to not combine duplicate entries. 1314 1315 `--section-start=SECTIONNAME=ORG' 1316 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute address given 1317 by ORG. You may use this option as many times as necessary to 1318 locate multiple sections in the command line. ORG must be a 1319 single hexadecimal integer; for compatibility with other linkers, 1320 you may omit the leading `0x' usually associated with hexadecimal 1321 values. _Note:_ there should be no white space between 1322 SECTIONNAME, the equals sign ("<=>"), and ORG. 1323 1324 `-Tbss=ORG' 1325 `-Tdata=ORG' 1326 `-Ttext=ORG' 1327 Same as `--section-start', with `.bss', `.data' or `.text' as the 1328 SECTIONNAME. 1329 1330 `-Ttext-segment=ORG' 1331 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the 1332 address of the first byte of the text segment. 1333 1334 `--unresolved-symbols=METHOD' 1335 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four 1336 possible values for `method': 1337 1338 `ignore-all' 1339 Do not report any unresolved symbols. 1340 1341 `report-all' 1342 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default. 1343 1344 `ignore-in-object-files' 1345 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared 1346 libraries, but ignore them if they come from regular object 1347 files. 1348 1349 `ignore-in-shared-libs' 1350 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object 1351 files, but ignore them if they come from shared libraries. 1352 This can be useful when creating a dynamic binary and it is 1353 known that all the shared libraries that it should be 1354 referencing are included on the linker's command line. 1355 1356 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be 1357 controlled by the `--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined' option. 1358 1359 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each 1360 reported unresolved symbol but the option 1361 `--warn-unresolved-symbols' can change this to a warning. 1362 1363 `--dll-verbose' 1364 `--verbose' 1365 Display the version number for `ld' and list the linker emulations 1366 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. 1367 Display the linker script being used by the linker. 1368 1369 `--version-script=VERSION-SCRIPTFILE' 1370 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is 1371 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify 1372 additional information about the version hierarchy for the library 1373 being created. This option is only fully supported on ELF 1374 platforms which support shared libraries; see *Note VERSION::. It 1375 is partially supported on PE platforms, which can use version 1376 scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any 1377 symbols marked `local' in the version script will not be exported. 1378 *Note WIN32::. 1379 1380 `--warn-common' 1381 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol 1382 or with a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat 1383 sloppy practise, but linkers on some other operating systems do 1384 not. This option allows you to find potential problems from 1385 combining global symbols. Unfortunately, some C libraries use 1386 this practise, so you may get some warnings about symbols in the 1387 libraries as well as in your programs. 1388 1389 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C 1390 examples: 1391 1392 `int i = 1;' 1393 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of 1394 the output file. 1395 1396 `extern int i;' 1397 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space. There 1398 must be either a definition or a common symbol for the 1399 variable somewhere. 1400 1401 `int i;' 1402 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common 1403 symbols for a variable, it goes in the uninitialized data 1404 area of the output file. The linker merges multiple common 1405 symbols for the same variable into a single symbol. If they 1406 are of different sizes, it picks the largest size. The 1407 linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is 1408 a definition of the same variable. 1409 1410 The `--warn-common' option can produce five kinds of warnings. 1411 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the 1412 symbol just encountered, and the second describes the previous 1413 symbol encountered with the same name. One or both of the two 1414 symbols will be a common symbol. 1415 1416 1. Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is 1417 already a definition for the symbol. 1418 FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL' 1419 overridden by definition 1420 FILE(SECTION): warning: defined here 1421 1422 2. Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later 1423 definition for the symbol is encountered. This is the same 1424 as the previous case, except that the symbols are encountered 1425 in a different order. 1426 FILE(SECTION): warning: definition of `SYMBOL' 1427 overriding common 1428 FILE(SECTION): warning: common is here 1429 1430 3. Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common 1431 symbol. 1432 FILE(SECTION): warning: multiple common 1433 of `SYMBOL' 1434 FILE(SECTION): warning: previous common is here 1435 1436 4. Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol. 1437 FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL' 1438 overridden by larger common 1439 FILE(SECTION): warning: larger common is here 1440 1441 5. Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common 1442 symbol. This is the same as the previous case, except that 1443 the symbols are encountered in a different order. 1444 FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL' 1445 overriding smaller common 1446 FILE(SECTION): warning: smaller common is here 1447 1448 `--warn-constructors' 1449 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for 1450 a few object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the 1451 linker can not detect the use of global constructors. 1452 1453 `--warn-multiple-gp' 1454 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output 1455 file. This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the 1456 Alpha. Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants 1457 in a special section. A special register (the global pointer) 1458 points into the middle of this section, so that constants can be 1459 loaded efficiently via a base-register relative addressing mode. 1460 Since the offset in base-register relative mode is fixed and 1461 relatively small (e.g., 16 bits), this limits the maximum size of 1462 the constant pool. Thus, in large programs, it is often necessary 1463 to use multiple global pointer values in order to be able to 1464 address all possible constants. This option causes a warning to 1465 be issued whenever this case occurs. 1466 1467 `--warn-once' 1468 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per 1469 module which refers to it. 1470 1471 `--warn-section-align' 1472 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of 1473 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input 1474 section. The address will only be changed if it not explicitly 1475 specified; that is, if the `SECTIONS' command does not specify a 1476 start address for the section (*note SECTIONS::). 1477 1478 `--warn-shared-textrel' 1479 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object. 1480 1481 `--warn-alternate-em' 1482 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code. 1483 1484 `--warn-unresolved-symbols' 1485 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the 1486 option `--unresolved-symbols') it will normally generate an error. 1487 This option makes it generate a warning instead. 1488 1489 `--error-unresolved-symbols' 1490 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors 1491 when it is reporting unresolved symbols. 1492 1493 `--whole-archive' 1494 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the 1495 `--whole-archive' option, include every object file in the archive 1496 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required 1497 object files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into 1498 a shared library, forcing every object to be included in the 1499 resulting shared library. This option may be used more than once. 1500 1501 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know 1502 about this option, so you have to use `-Wl,-whole-archive'. 1503 Second, don't forget to use `-Wl,-no-whole-archive' after your 1504 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to 1505 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well. 1506 1507 `--wrap=SYMBOL' 1508 Use a wrapper function for SYMBOL. Any undefined reference to 1509 SYMBOL will be resolved to `__wrap_SYMBOL'. Any undefined 1510 reference to `__real_SYMBOL' will be resolved to SYMBOL. 1511 1512 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The 1513 wrapper function should be called `__wrap_SYMBOL'. If it wishes 1514 to call the system function, it should call `__real_SYMBOL'. 1515 1516 Here is a trivial example: 1517 1518 void * 1519 __wrap_malloc (size_t c) 1520 { 1521 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c); 1522 return __real_malloc (c); 1523 } 1524 1525 If you link other code with this file using `--wrap malloc', then 1526 all calls to `malloc' will call the function `__wrap_malloc' 1527 instead. The call to `__real_malloc' in `__wrap_malloc' will call 1528 the real `malloc' function. 1529 1530 You may wish to provide a `__real_malloc' function as well, so that 1531 links without the `--wrap' option will succeed. If you do this, 1532 you should not put the definition of `__real_malloc' in the same 1533 file as `__wrap_malloc'; if you do, the assembler may resolve the 1534 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to `malloc'. 1535 1536 `--eh-frame-hdr' 1537 Request creation of `.eh_frame_hdr' section and ELF 1538 `PT_GNU_EH_FRAME' segment header. 1539 1540 `--enable-new-dtags' 1541 `--disable-new-dtags' 1542 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older 1543 ELF systems may not understand them. If you specify 1544 `--enable-new-dtags', the dynamic tags will be created as needed. 1545 If you specify `--disable-new-dtags', no new dynamic tags will be 1546 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note 1547 that those options are only available for ELF systems. 1548 1549 `--hash-size=NUMBER' 1550 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number 1551 close to NUMBER. Increasing this value can reduce the length of 1552 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of 1553 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing 1554 this value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of 1555 speed. 1556 1557 `--hash-style=STYLE' 1558 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). STYLE can be either 1559 `sysv' for classic ELF `.hash' section, `gnu' for new style GNU 1560 `.gnu.hash' section or `both' for both the classic ELF `.hash' and 1561 new style GNU `.gnu.hash' hash tables. The default is `sysv'. 1562 1563 `--reduce-memory-overheads' 1564 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the 1565 expense of linking speed. This was introduced to select the old 1566 O(n^2) algorithm for link map file generation, rather than the new 1567 O(n) algorithm which uses about 40% more memory for symbol storage. 1568 1569 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size 1570 to 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the 1571 linker's run time. This is not done however if the `--hash-size' 1572 switch has been used. 1573 1574 The `--reduce-memory-overheads' switch may be also be used to 1575 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker. 1576 1577 `--build-id' 1578 `--build-id=STYLE' 1579 Request creation of `.note.gnu.build-id' ELF note section. The 1580 contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked file. 1581 STYLE can be `uuid' to use 128 random bits, `sha1' to use a 1582 160-bit SHA1 hash on the normative parts of the output contents, 1583 `md5' to use a 128-bit MD5 hash on the normative parts of the 1584 output contents, or `0xHEXSTRING' to use a chosen bit string 1585 specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (`-' and `:' 1586 characters between digit pairs are ignored). If STYLE is omitted, 1587 `sha1' is used. 1588 1589 The `md5' and `sha1' styles produces an identifier that is always 1590 the same in an identical output file, but will be unique among all 1591 nonidentical output files. It is not intended to be compared as a 1592 checksum for the file's contents. A linked file may be changed 1593 later by other tools, but the build ID bit string identifying the 1594 original linked file does not change. 1595 1596 Passing `none' for STYLE disables the setting from any 1597 `--build-id' options earlier on the command line. 1598 1599 2.1.1 Options Specific to i386 PE Targets 1600 ----------------------------------------- 1601 1602 The i386 PE linker supports the `-shared' option, which causes the 1603 output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a normal 1604 executable. You should name the output `*.dll' when you use this 1605 option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard `*.def' 1606 files, which may be specified on the linker command line like an object 1607 file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports symbols from, to 1608 ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal object file). 1609 1610 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker 1611 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386 1612 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their values 1613 by either a space or an equals sign. 1614 1615 `--add-stdcall-alias' 1616 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@NN) will be exported 1617 as-is and also with the suffix stripped. [This option is specific 1618 to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker] 1619 1620 `--base-file FILE' 1621 Use FILE as the name of a file in which to save the base addresses 1622 of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with `dlltool'. 1623 [This is an i386 PE specific option] 1624 1625 `--dll' 1626 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use 1627 `-shared' or specify a `LIBRARY' in a given `.def' file. [This 1628 option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker] 1629 1630 `--enable-long-section-names' 1631 `--disable-long-section-names' 1632 The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that 1633 permits the use of section names longer than eight characters, the 1634 normal limit for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed 1635 in object files, as fully-linked executable images do not carry 1636 the Coff string table required to support the longer names. As a 1637 GNU extension, it is possible to allow their use in executable 1638 images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!) disallow it in 1639 object files, by using these two options. Executable images 1640 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, 1641 carrying as they do a string table, and may generate confusing 1642 output when examined with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file 1643 viewers and dumpers. However, GDB relies on the use of PE long 1644 section names to find Dwarf-2 debug information sections in an 1645 executable image at runtime, and so if neither option is specified 1646 on the command-line, `ld' will enable long section names, 1647 overriding the default and technically correct behaviour, when it 1648 finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable 1649 image and not stripping symbols. [This option is valid for all PE 1650 targeted ports of the linker] 1651 1652 `--enable-stdcall-fixup' 1653 `--disable-stdcall-fixup' 1654 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt 1655 to do "fuzzy linking" by looking for another defined symbol that 1656 differs only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) 1657 and will resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For 1658 example, the undefined symbol `_foo' might be linked to the 1659 function `_foo@12', or the undefined symbol `_bar@16' might be 1660 linked to the function `_bar'. When the linker does this, it 1661 prints a warning, since it normally should have failed to link, 1662 but sometimes import libraries generated from third-party dlls may 1663 need this feature to be usable. If you specify 1664 `--enable-stdcall-fixup', this feature is fully enabled and 1665 warnings are not printed. If you specify 1666 `--disable-stdcall-fixup', this feature is disabled and such 1667 mismatches are considered to be errors. [This option is specific 1668 to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker] 1669 1670 `--export-all-symbols' 1671 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL 1672 will be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if 1673 there otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are 1674 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via 1675 function attributes, the default is to not export anything else 1676 unless this option is given. Note that the symbols `DllMain@12', 1677 `DllEntryPoint@0', `DllMainCRTStartup@12', and `impure_ptr' will 1678 not be automatically exported. Also, symbols imported from other 1679 DLLs will not be re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the 1680 DLL's internal layout such as those beginning with `_head_' or 1681 ending with `_iname'. In addition, no symbols from `libgcc', 1682 `libstd++', `libmingw32', or `crtX.o' will be exported. Symbols 1683 whose names begin with `__rtti_' or `__builtin_' will not be 1684 exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an extensive 1685 list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported (obviously, 1686 this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets). These 1687 cygwin-excludes are: `_cygwin_dll_entry@12', 1688 `_cygwin_crt0_common@8', `_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@12', 1689 `_fmode', `_impure_ptr', `cygwin_attach_dll', `cygwin_premain0', 1690 `cygwin_premain1', `cygwin_premain2', `cygwin_premain3', and 1691 `environ'. [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port 1692 of the linker] 1693 1694 `--exclude-symbols SYMBOL,SYMBOL,...' 1695 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically 1696 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons. 1697 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the 1698 linker] 1699 1700 `--file-alignment' 1701 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always 1702 begin at file offsets which are multiples of this number. This 1703 defaults to 512. [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted 1704 port of the linker] 1705 1706 `--heap RESERVE' 1707 `--heap RESERVE,COMMIT' 1708 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally 1709 commit) to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb 1710 reserved, 4K committed. [This option is specific to the i386 PE 1711 targeted port of the linker] 1712 1713 `--image-base VALUE' 1714 Use VALUE as the base address of your program or dll. This is the 1715 lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll 1716 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance 1717 of your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not 1718 overlap any other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, 1719 and 0x10000000 for dlls. [This option is specific to the i386 PE 1720 targeted port of the linker] 1721 1722 `--kill-at' 1723 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@NN) will be stripped from symbols 1724 before they are exported. [This option is specific to the i386 PE 1725 targeted port of the linker] 1726 1727 `--large-address-aware' 1728 If given, the appropriate bit in the "Characteristics" field of 1729 the COFF header is set to indicate that this executable supports 1730 virtual addresses greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used 1731 in conjunction with the /3GB or /USERVA=VALUE megabytes switch in 1732 the "[operating systems]" section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, 1733 this bit has no effect. [This option is specific to PE targeted 1734 ports of the linker] 1735 1736 `--major-image-version VALUE' 1737 Sets the major number of the "image version". Defaults to 1. 1738 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the 1739 linker] 1740 1741 `--major-os-version VALUE' 1742 Sets the major number of the "os version". Defaults to 4. [This 1743 option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker] 1744 1745 `--major-subsystem-version VALUE' 1746 Sets the major number of the "subsystem version". Defaults to 4. 1747 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the 1748 linker] 1749 1750 `--minor-image-version VALUE' 1751 Sets the minor number of the "image version". Defaults to 0. 1752 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the 1753 linker] 1754 1755 `--minor-os-version VALUE' 1756 Sets the minor number of the "os version". Defaults to 0. [This 1757 option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker] 1758 1759 `--minor-subsystem-version VALUE' 1760 Sets the minor number of the "subsystem version". Defaults to 0. 1761 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the 1762 linker] 1763 1764 `--output-def FILE' 1765 The linker will create the file FILE which will contain a DEF file 1766 corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file 1767 (which should be called `*.def') may be used to create an import 1768 library with `dlltool' or may be used as a reference to 1769 automatically or implicitly exported symbols. [This option is 1770 specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker] 1771 1772 `--out-implib FILE' 1773 The linker will create the file FILE which will contain an import 1774 lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This import 1775 lib (which should be called `*.dll.a' or `*.a' may be used to link 1776 clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour makes it 1777 possible to skip a separate `dlltool' import library creation step. 1778 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the 1779 linker] 1780 1781 `--enable-auto-image-base' 1782 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is 1783 specified using the `--image-base' argument. By using a hash 1784 generated from the dllname to create unique image bases for each 1785 DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program 1786 execution are avoided. [This option is specific to the i386 PE 1787 targeted port of the linker] 1788 1789 `--disable-auto-image-base' 1790 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no 1791 user-specified image base (`--image-base') then use the platform 1792 default. [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of 1793 the linker] 1794 1795 `--dll-search-prefix STRING' 1796 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library, 1797 search for `<string><basename>.dll' in preference to 1798 `lib<basename>.dll'. This behaviour allows easy distinction 1799 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin, 1800 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use 1801 `--dll-search-prefix=cyg'. [This option is specific to the i386 1802 PE targeted port of the linker] 1803 1804 `--enable-auto-import' 1805 Do sophisticated linking of `_symbol' to `__imp__symbol' for DATA 1806 imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when 1807 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use 1808 of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the 1809 image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the 1810 PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft. 1811 1812 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only 1813 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be 1814 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work 1815 around a problem with consts that is described here: 1816 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html 1817 1818 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' - but sometimes you 1819 may see this message: 1820 1821 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the 1822 documentation for ld's `--enable-auto-import' for details." 1823 1824 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address 1825 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables 1826 only allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses 1827 to member fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well 1828 as using a constant index into an array variable imported from a 1829 DLL. Any multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may 1830 trigger this error condition. However, regardless of the exact 1831 data type of the offending exported variable, ld will always 1832 detect it, issue the warning, and exit. 1833 1834 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of 1835 the data type of the exported variable: 1836 1837 One way is to use -enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves 1838 the task of adjusting references in your client code for runtime 1839 environment, so this method works only when runtime environment 1840 supports this feature. 1841 1842 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a 1843 variable - that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. 1844 For arrays, there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the 1845 array's address) a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a 1846 variable. Thus: 1847 1848 extern type extern_array[]; 1849 extern_array[1] --> 1850 { volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] } 1851 1852 or 1853 1854 extern type extern_array[]; 1855 extern_array[1] --> 1856 { volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] } 1857 1858 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option 1859 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) 1860 variable: 1861 1862 extern struct s extern_struct; 1863 extern_struct.field --> 1864 { volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field } 1865 1866 or 1867 1868 extern long long extern_ll; 1869 extern_ll --> 1870 { volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll } 1871 1872 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon 1873 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with 1874 `__declspec(dllimport)'. However, in practise that requires using 1875 compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are building a DLL, 1876 building client code that will link to the DLL, or merely 1877 building/linking to a static library. In making the choice 1878 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with 1879 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world 1880 usage: 1881 1882 Original: 1883 --foo.h 1884 extern int arr[]; 1885 --foo.c 1886 #include "foo.h" 1887 void main(int argc, char **argv){ 1888 printf("%d\n",arr[1]); 1889 } 1890 1891 Solution 1: 1892 --foo.h 1893 extern int arr[]; 1894 --foo.c 1895 #include "foo.h" 1896 void main(int argc, char **argv){ 1897 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */ 1898 volatile int *parr = arr; 1899 printf("%d\n",parr[1]); 1900 } 1901 1902 Solution 2: 1903 --foo.h 1904 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */ 1905 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \ 1906 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC)) 1907 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport) 1908 #else 1909 #define FOO_IMPORT 1910 #endif 1911 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[]; 1912 --foo.c 1913 #include "foo.h" 1914 void main(int argc, char **argv){ 1915 printf("%d\n",arr[1]); 1916 } 1917 1918 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your library to 1919 use a functional interface rather than a data interface for the 1920 offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor 1921 functions). [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port 1922 of the linker] 1923 1924 `--disable-auto-import' 1925 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of `_symbol' to 1926 `__imp__symbol' for DATA imports from DLLs. [This option is 1927 specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker] 1928 1929 `--enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc' 1930 If your code contains expressions described in -enable-auto-import 1931 section, that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this 1932 switch will create a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which 1933 can be used by runtime environment to adjust references to such 1934 data in your client code. [This option is specific to the i386 PE 1935 targeted port of the linker] 1936 1937 `--disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc' 1938 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports 1939 from DLLs. This is the default. [This option is specific to the 1940 i386 PE targeted port of the linker] 1941 1942 `--enable-extra-pe-debug' 1943 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking. 1944 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the 1945 linker] 1946 1947 `--section-alignment' 1948 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin 1949 at addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 1950 0x1000. [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of 1951 the linker] 1952 1953 `--stack RESERVE' 1954 `--stack RESERVE,COMMIT' 1955 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally 1956 commit) to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb 1957 reserved, 4K committed. [This option is specific to the i386 PE 1958 targeted port of the linker] 1959 1960 `--subsystem WHICH' 1961 `--subsystem WHICH:MAJOR' 1962 `--subsystem WHICH:MAJOR.MINOR' 1963 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The 1964 legal values for WHICH are `native', `windows', `console', 1965 `posix', and `xbox'. You may optionally set the subsystem version 1966 also. Numeric values are also accepted for WHICH. [This option 1967 is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker] 1968 1969 The following options set flags in the `DllCharacteristics' field 1970 of the PE file header: [These options are specific to PE targeted 1971 ports of the linker] 1972 1973 `--dynamicbase' 1974 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout 1975 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows 1976 Vista for i386 PE targets. 1977 1978 `--forceinteg' 1979 Code integrity checks are enforced. 1980 1981 `--nxcompat' 1982 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention. This 1983 feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets. 1984 1985 `--no-isolation' 1986 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image. 1987 1988 `--no-seh' 1989 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from this 1990 image. 1991 1992 `--no-bind' 1993 Do not bind this image. 1994 1995 `--wdmdriver' 1996 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model. 1997 1998 `--tsaware' 1999 The image is Terminal Server aware. 2000 2001 2002 2.1.2 Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets 2003 ------------------------------------------------------------ 2004 2005 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the 2006 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation. 2007 2008 `--no-trampoline' 2009 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a 2010 trampoline is generated for each far function which is called 2011 using a `jsr' instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far 2012 function is taken). 2013 2014 `--bank-window NAME' 2015 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region 2016 in the `MEMORY' specification that describes the memory bank 2017 window. The definition of such region is then used by the linker 2018 to compute paging and addresses within the memory window. 2019 2020 2021 2.1.3 Options specific to Motorola 68K target 2022 --------------------------------------------- 2023 2024 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT 2025 generation when linking for 68K targets. 2026 2027 `--got=TYPE' 2028 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use. 2029 TYPE should be one of `single', `negative', `multigot' or 2030 `target'. For more information refer to the Info entry for `ld'. 2031 2032 2033 2034 File: ld.info, Node: Environment, Prev: Options, Up: Invocation 2035 2036 2.2 Environment Variables 2037 ========================= 2038 2039 You can change the behaviour of `ld' with the environment variables 2040 `GNUTARGET', `LDEMULATION' and `COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE'. 2041 2042 `GNUTARGET' determines the input-file object format if you don't use 2043 `-b' (or its synonym `--format'). Its value should be one of the BFD 2044 names for an input format (*note BFD::). If there is no `GNUTARGET' in 2045 the environment, `ld' uses the natural format of the target. If 2046 `GNUTARGET' is set to `default' then BFD attempts to discover the input 2047 format by examining binary input files; this method often succeeds, but 2048 there are potential ambiguities, since there is no method of ensuring 2049 that the magic number used to specify object-file formats is unique. 2050 However, the configuration procedure for BFD on each system places the 2051 conventional format for that system first in the search-list, so 2052 ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention. 2053 2054 `LDEMULATION' determines the default emulation if you don't use the 2055 `-m' option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker 2056 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the 2057 available emulations with the `--verbose' or `-V' options. If the `-m' 2058 option is not used, and the `LDEMULATION' environment variable is not 2059 defined, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was 2060 configured. 2061 2062 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if 2063 `COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE' is set in the environment, then it will default 2064 to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in a 2065 similar fashion by the `gcc' linker wrapper program. The default may 2066 be overridden by the `--demangle' and `--no-demangle' options. 2067 2068 2069 File: ld.info, Node: Scripts, Next: Machine Dependent, Prev: Invocation, Up: Top 2070 2071 3 Linker Scripts 2072 **************** 2073 2074 Every link is controlled by a "linker script". This script is written 2075 in the linker command language. 2076 2077 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the 2078 sections in the input files should be mapped into the output file, and 2079 to control the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts 2080 do nothing more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script 2081 can also direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the 2082 commands described below. 2083 2084 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one 2085 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the 2086 linker executable. You can use the `--verbose' command line option to 2087 display the default linker script. Certain command line options, such 2088 as `-r' or `-N', will affect the default linker script. 2089 2090 You may supply your own linker script by using the `-T' command line 2091 option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the default 2092 linker script. 2093 2094 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input 2095 files to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. *Note 2096 Implicit Linker Scripts::. 2097 2098 * Menu: 2099 2100 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts 2101 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format 2102 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example 2103 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands 2104 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols 2105 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command 2106 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command 2107 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command 2108 * VERSION:: VERSION Command 2109 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts 2110 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts 2111 2112 2113 File: ld.info, Node: Basic Script Concepts, Next: Script Format, Up: Scripts 2114 2115 3.1 Basic Linker Script Concepts 2116 ================================ 2117 2118 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to 2119 describe the linker script language. 2120 2121 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The 2122 output file and each input file are in a special data format known as an 2123 "object file format". Each file is called an "object file". The 2124 output file is often called an "executable", but for our purposes we 2125 will also call it an object file. Each object file has, among other 2126 things, a list of "sections". We sometimes refer to a section in an 2127 input file as an "input section"; similarly, a section in the output 2128 file is an "output section". 2129 2130 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections 2131 also have an associated block of data, known as the "section contents". 2132 A section may be marked as "loadable", which mean that the contents 2133 should be loaded into memory when the output file is run. A section 2134 with no contents may be "allocatable", which means that an area in 2135 memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be loaded 2136 there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section which 2137 is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort of 2138 debugging information. 2139 2140 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The 2141 first is the "VMA", or virtual memory address. This is the address the 2142 section will have when the output file is run. The second is the 2143 "LMA", or load memory address. This is the address at which the 2144 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the 2145 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section 2146 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up 2147 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM 2148 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the 2149 RAM address would be the VMA. 2150 2151 You can see the sections in an object file by using the `objdump' 2152 program with the `-h' option. 2153 2154 Every object file also has a list of "symbols", known as the "symbol 2155 table". A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol has a name, 2156 and each defined symbol has an address, among other information. If 2157 you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you will get a 2158 defined symbol for every defined function and global or static 2159 variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is 2160 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol. 2161 2162 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the `nm' program, 2163 or by using the `objdump' program with the `-t' option. 2164 2165 2166 File: ld.info, Node: Script Format, Next: Simple Example, Prev: Basic Script Concepts, Up: Scripts 2167 2168 3.2 Linker Script Format 2169 ======================== 2170 2171 Linker scripts are text files. 2172 2173 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is 2174 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a 2175 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is 2176 generally ignored. 2177 2178 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered 2179 directly. If the file name contains a character such as a comma which 2180 would otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name 2181 in double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a 2182 file name. 2183 2184 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by 2185 `/*' and `*/'. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent to 2186 whitespace. 2187 2188 2189 File: ld.info, Node: Simple Example, Next: Simple Commands, Prev: Script Format, Up: Scripts 2190 2191 3.3 Simple Linker Script Example 2192 ================================ 2193 2194 Many linker scripts are fairly simple. 2195 2196 The simplest possible linker script has just one command: 2197 `SECTIONS'. You use the `SECTIONS' command to describe the memory 2198 layout of the output file. 2199 2200 The `SECTIONS' command is a powerful command. Here we will describe 2201 a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of code, 2202 initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the 2203 `.text', `.data', and `.bss' sections, respectively. Let's assume 2204 further that these are the only sections which appear in your input 2205 files. 2206 2207 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address 2208 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a 2209 linker script which will do that: 2210 SECTIONS 2211 { 2212 . = 0x10000; 2213 .text : { *(.text) } 2214 . = 0x8000000; 2215 .data : { *(.data) } 2216 .bss : { *(.bss) } 2217 } 2218 2219 You write the `SECTIONS' command as the keyword `SECTIONS', followed 2220 by a series of symbol assignments and output section descriptions 2221 enclosed in curly braces. 2222 2223 The first line inside the `SECTIONS' command of the above example 2224 sets the value of the special symbol `.', which is the location 2225 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some 2226 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the 2227 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then 2228 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the 2229 `SECTIONS' command, the location counter has the value `0'. 2230 2231 The second line defines an output section, `.text'. The colon is 2232 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces 2233 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections 2234 which should be placed into this output section. The `*' is a wildcard 2235 which matches any file name. The expression `*(.text)' means all 2236 `.text' input sections in all input files. 2237 2238 Since the location counter is `0x10000' when the output section 2239 `.text' is defined, the linker will set the address of the `.text' 2240 section in the output file to be `0x10000'. 2241 2242 The remaining lines define the `.data' and `.bss' sections in the 2243 output file. The linker will place the `.data' output section at 2244 address `0x8000000'. After the linker places the `.data' output 2245 section, the value of the location counter will be `0x8000000' plus the 2246 size of the `.data' output section. The effect is that the linker will 2247 place the `.bss' output section immediately after the `.data' output 2248 section in memory. 2249 2250 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required 2251 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this 2252 example, the specified addresses for the `.text' and `.data' sections 2253 will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker may 2254 have to create a small gap between the `.data' and `.bss' sections. 2255 2256 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script. 2257 2258 2259 File: ld.info, Node: Simple Commands, Next: Assignments, Prev: Simple Example, Up: Scripts 2260 2261 3.4 Simple Linker Script Commands 2262 ================================= 2263 2264 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands. 2265 2266 * Menu: 2267 2268 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point 2269 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files 2270 2271 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats 2272 2273 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions 2274 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands 2275 2276 2277 File: ld.info, Node: Entry Point, Next: File Commands, Up: Simple Commands 2278 2279 3.4.1 Setting the Entry Point 2280 ----------------------------- 2281 2282 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the "entry 2283 point". You can use the `ENTRY' linker script command to set the entry 2284 point. The argument is a symbol name: 2285 ENTRY(SYMBOL) 2286 2287 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set 2288 the entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and 2289 stopping when one of them succeeds: 2290 * the `-e' ENTRY command-line option; 2291 2292 * the `ENTRY(SYMBOL)' command in a linker script; 2293 2294 * the value of the symbol `start', if defined; 2295 2296 * the address of the first byte of the `.text' section, if present; 2297 2298 * The address `0'. 2299 2300 2301 File: ld.info, Node: File Commands, Next: Format Commands, Prev: Entry Point, Up: Simple Commands 2302 2303 3.4.2 Commands Dealing with Files 2304 --------------------------------- 2305 2306 Several linker script commands deal with files. 2307 2308 `INCLUDE FILENAME' 2309 Include the linker script FILENAME at this point. The file will 2310 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory 2311 specified with the `-L' option. You can nest calls to `INCLUDE' 2312 up to 10 levels deep. 2313 2314 You can place `INCLUDE' directives at the top level, in `MEMORY' or 2315 `SECTIONS' commands, or in output section descriptions. 2316 2317 `INPUT(FILE, FILE, ...)' 2318 `INPUT(FILE FILE ...)' 2319 The `INPUT' command directs the linker to include the named files 2320 in the link, as though they were named on the command line. 2321 2322 For example, if you always want to include `subr.o' any time you do 2323 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command 2324 line, then you can put `INPUT (subr.o)' in your linker script. 2325 2326 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the 2327 linker script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a `-T' 2328 option. 2329 2330 In case a "sysroot prefix" is configured, and the filename starts 2331 with the `/' character, and the script being processed was located 2332 inside the "sysroot prefix", the filename will be looked for in 2333 the "sysroot prefix". Otherwise, the linker will try to open the 2334 file in the current directory. If it is not found, the linker 2335 will search through the archive library search path. See the 2336 description of `-L' in *Note Command Line Options: Options. 2337 2338 If you use `INPUT (-lFILE)', `ld' will transform the name to 2339 `libFILE.a', as with the command line argument `-l'. 2340 2341 When you use the `INPUT' command in an implicit linker script, the 2342 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker 2343 script file is included. This can affect archive searching. 2344 2345 `GROUP(FILE, FILE, ...)' 2346 `GROUP(FILE FILE ...)' 2347 The `GROUP' command is like `INPUT', except that the named files 2348 should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no 2349 new undefined references are created. See the description of `-(' 2350 in *Note Command Line Options: Options. 2351 2352 `AS_NEEDED(FILE, FILE, ...)' 2353 `AS_NEEDED(FILE FILE ...)' 2354 This construct can appear only inside of the `INPUT' or `GROUP' 2355 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled 2356 as if they appear directly in the `INPUT' or `GROUP' commands, 2357 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only 2358 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables 2359 `--as-needed' option for all the files listed inside of it and 2360 restores previous `--as-needed' resp. `--no-as-needed' setting 2361 afterwards. 2362 2363 `OUTPUT(FILENAME)' 2364 The `OUTPUT' command names the output file. Using 2365 `OUTPUT(FILENAME)' in the linker script is exactly like using `-o 2366 FILENAME' on the command line (*note Command Line Options: 2367 Options.). If both are used, the command line option takes 2368 precedence. 2369 2370 You can use the `OUTPUT' command to define a default name for the 2371 output file other than the usual default of `a.out'. 2372 2373 `SEARCH_DIR(PATH)' 2374 The `SEARCH_DIR' command adds PATH to the list of paths where `ld' 2375 looks for archive libraries. Using `SEARCH_DIR(PATH)' is exactly 2376 like using `-L PATH' on the command line (*note Command Line 2377 Options: Options.). If both are used, then the linker will search 2378 both paths. Paths specified using the command line option are 2379 searched first. 2380 2381 `STARTUP(FILENAME)' 2382 The `STARTUP' command is just like the `INPUT' command, except 2383 that FILENAME will become the first input file to be linked, as 2384 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be 2385 useful when using a system in which the entry point is always the 2386 start of the first file. 2387 2388 2389 File: ld.info, Node: Format Commands, Next: REGION_ALIAS, Prev: File Commands, Up: Simple Commands 2390 2391 3.4.3 Commands Dealing with Object File Formats 2392 ----------------------------------------------- 2393 2394 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats. 2395 2396 `OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME)' 2397 `OUTPUT_FORMAT(DEFAULT, BIG, LITTLE)' 2398 The `OUTPUT_FORMAT' command names the BFD format to use for the 2399 output file (*note BFD::). Using `OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME)' is 2400 exactly like using `--oformat BFDNAME' on the command line (*note 2401 Command Line Options: Options.). If both are used, the command 2402 line option takes precedence. 2403 2404 You can use `OUTPUT_FORMAT' with three arguments to use different 2405 formats based on the `-EB' and `-EL' command line options. This 2406 permits the linker script to set the output format based on the 2407 desired endianness. 2408 2409 If neither `-EB' nor `-EL' are used, then the output format will 2410 be the first argument, DEFAULT. If `-EB' is used, the output 2411 format will be the second argument, BIG. If `-EL' is used, the 2412 output format will be the third argument, LITTLE. 2413 2414 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target 2415 uses this command: 2416 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips) 2417 This says that the default format for the output file is 2418 `elf32-bigmips', but if the user uses the `-EL' command line 2419 option, the output file will be created in the `elf32-littlemips' 2420 format. 2421 2422 `TARGET(BFDNAME)' 2423 The `TARGET' command names the BFD format to use when reading input 2424 files. It affects subsequent `INPUT' and `GROUP' commands. This 2425 command is like using `-b BFDNAME' on the command line (*note 2426 Command Line Options: Options.). If the `TARGET' command is used 2427 but `OUTPUT_FORMAT' is not, then the last `TARGET' command is also 2428 used to set the format for the output file. *Note BFD::. 2429 2430 2431 File: ld.info, Node: REGION_ALIAS, Next: Miscellaneous Commands, Prev: Format Commands, Up: Simple Commands 2432 2433 3.4.4 Assign alias names to memory regions 2434 ------------------------------------------ 2435 2436 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the 2437 *Note MEMORY:: command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory 2438 region. 2439 2440 REGION_ALIAS(ALIAS, REGION) 2441 2442 The `REGION_ALIAS' function creates an alias name ALIAS for the 2443 memory region REGION. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections 2444 to memory regions. An example follows. 2445 2446 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with 2447 various memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile 2448 memory `RAM' that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have 2449 a read-only, non-volatile memory `ROM' that allows code execution and 2450 read-only data access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile 2451 memory `ROM2' with read-only data access and no code execution 2452 capability. We have four output sections: 2453 2454 * `.text' program code; 2455 2456 * `.rodata' read-only data; 2457 2458 * `.data' read-write initialized data; 2459 2460 * `.bss' read-write zero initialized data. 2461 2462 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system 2463 independent part defining the output sections and a system dependent 2464 part mapping the output sections to the memory regions available on the 2465 system. Our embedded systems come with three different memory setups 2466 `A', `B' and `C': 2467 Section Variant A Variant B Variant C 2468 .text RAM ROM ROM 2469 .rodata RAM ROM ROM2 2470 .data RAM RAM/ROM RAM/ROM2 2471 .bss RAM RAM RAM 2472 The notation `RAM/ROM' or `RAM/ROM2' means that this section is 2473 loaded into region `ROM' or `ROM2' respectively. Please note that the 2474 load address of the `.data' section starts in all three variants at the 2475 end of the `.rodata' section. 2476 2477 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. 2478 It includes the system dependent `linkcmds.memory' file that describes 2479 the memory layout: 2480 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory 2481 2482 SECTIONS 2483 { 2484 .text : 2485 { 2486 *(.text) 2487 } > REGION_TEXT 2488 .rodata : 2489 { 2490 *(.rodata) 2491 rodata_end = .; 2492 } > REGION_RODATA 2493 .data : AT (rodata_end) 2494 { 2495 data_start = .; 2496 *(.data) 2497 } > REGION_DATA 2498 data_size = SIZEOF(.data); 2499 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data); 2500 .bss : 2501 { 2502 *(.bss) 2503 } > REGION_BSS 2504 } 2505 2506 Now we need three different `linkcmds.memory' files to define memory 2507 regions and alias names. The content of `linkcmds.memory' for the three 2508 variants `A', `B' and `C': 2509 `A' 2510 Here everything goes into the `RAM'. 2511 MEMORY 2512 { 2513 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M 2514 } 2515 2516 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM); 2517 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM); 2518 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM); 2519 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM); 2520 2521 `B' 2522 Program code and read-only data go into the `ROM'. Read-write 2523 data goes into the `RAM'. An image of the initialized data is 2524 loaded into the `ROM' and will be copied during system start into 2525 the `RAM'. 2526 MEMORY 2527 { 2528 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M 2529 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M 2530 } 2531 2532 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM); 2533 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM); 2534 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM); 2535 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM); 2536 2537 `C' 2538 Program code goes into the `ROM'. Read-only data goes into the 2539 `ROM2'. Read-write data goes into the `RAM'. An image of the 2540 initialized data is loaded into the `ROM2' and will be copied 2541 during system start into the `RAM'. 2542 MEMORY 2543 { 2544 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M 2545 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M 2546 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M 2547 } 2548 2549 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM); 2550 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2); 2551 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM); 2552 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM); 2553 2554 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to 2555 copy the `.data' section from `ROM' or `ROM2' into the `RAM' if 2556 necessary: 2557 #include <string.h> 2558 2559 extern char data_start []; 2560 extern char data_size []; 2561 extern char data_load_start []; 2562 2563 void copy_data(void) 2564 { 2565 if (data_start != data_load_start) 2566 { 2567 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size); 2568 } 2569 } 2570 2571 2572 File: ld.info, Node: Miscellaneous Commands, Prev: REGION_ALIAS, Up: Simple Commands 2573 2574 3.4.5 Other Linker Script Commands 2575 ---------------------------------- 2576 2577 There are a few other linker scripts commands. 2578 2579 `ASSERT(EXP, MESSAGE)' 2580 Ensure that EXP is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker 2581 with an error code, and print MESSAGE. 2582 2583 `EXTERN(SYMBOL SYMBOL ...)' 2584 Force SYMBOL to be entered in the output file as an undefined 2585 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional 2586 modules from standard libraries. You may list several SYMBOLs for 2587 each `EXTERN', and you may use `EXTERN' multiple times. This 2588 command has the same effect as the `-u' command-line option. 2589 2590 `FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION' 2591 This command has the same effect as the `-d' command-line option: 2592 to make `ld' assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable 2593 output file is specified (`-r'). 2594 2595 `INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION' 2596 This command has the same effect as the `--no-define-common' 2597 command-line option: to make `ld' omit the assignment of addresses 2598 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file. 2599 2600 `INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] OUTPUT_SECTION' 2601 This command is typically used in a script specified by `-T' to 2602 augment the default `SECTIONS' with, for example, overlays. It 2603 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before) 2604 OUTPUT_SECTION, and also causes `-T' to not override the default 2605 linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan 2606 sections. *Note Location Counter::. The insertion happens after 2607 the linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to 2608 the insertion, since `-T' scripts are parsed before the default 2609 linker script, statements in the `-T' script occur before the 2610 default linker script statements in the internal linker 2611 representation of the script. In particular, input section 2612 assignments will be made to `-T' output sections before those in 2613 the default script. Here is an example of how a `-T' script using 2614 `INSERT' might look: 2615 2616 SECTIONS 2617 { 2618 OVERLAY : 2619 { 2620 .ov1 { ov1*(.text) } 2621 .ov2 { ov2*(.text) } 2622 } 2623 } 2624 INSERT AFTER .text; 2625 2626 `NOCROSSREFS(SECTION SECTION ...)' 2627 This command may be used to tell `ld' to issue an error about any 2628 references among certain output sections. 2629 2630 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when 2631 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another 2632 section will not be. Any direct references between the two 2633 sections would be errors. For example, it would be an error if 2634 code in one section called a function defined in the other section. 2635 2636 The `NOCROSSREFS' command takes a list of output section names. If 2637 `ld' detects any cross references between the sections, it reports 2638 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the 2639 `NOCROSSREFS' command uses output section names, not input section 2640 names. 2641 2642 `OUTPUT_ARCH(BFDARCH)' 2643 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is 2644 one of the names used by the BFD library (*note BFD::). You can 2645 see the architecture of an object file by using the `objdump' 2646 program with the `-f' option. 2647 2648 2649 File: ld.info, Node: Assignments, Next: SECTIONS, Prev: Simple Commands, Up: Scripts 2650 2651 3.5 Assigning Values to Symbols 2652 =============================== 2653 2654 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define 2655 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope. 2656 2657 * Menu: 2658 2659 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments 2660 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE 2661 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN 2662 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code 2663 2664 2665 File: ld.info, Node: Simple Assignments, Next: PROVIDE, Up: Assignments 2666 2667 3.5.1 Simple Assignments 2668 ------------------------ 2669 2670 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators: 2671 2672 `SYMBOL = EXPRESSION ;' 2673 `SYMBOL += EXPRESSION ;' 2674 `SYMBOL -= EXPRESSION ;' 2675 `SYMBOL *= EXPRESSION ;' 2676 `SYMBOL /= EXPRESSION ;' 2677 `SYMBOL <<= EXPRESSION ;' 2678 `SYMBOL >>= EXPRESSION ;' 2679 `SYMBOL &= EXPRESSION ;' 2680 `SYMBOL |= EXPRESSION ;' 2681 2682 The first case will define SYMBOL to the value of EXPRESSION. In 2683 the other cases, SYMBOL must already be defined, and the value will be 2684 adjusted accordingly. 2685 2686 The special symbol name `.' indicates the location counter. You may 2687 only use this within a `SECTIONS' command. *Note Location Counter::. 2688 2689 The semicolon after EXPRESSION is required. 2690 2691 Expressions are defined below; see *Note Expressions::. 2692 2693 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or 2694 as statements within a `SECTIONS' command, or as part of an output 2695 section description in a `SECTIONS' command. 2696 2697 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the 2698 expression; for more information, see *Note Expression Section::. 2699 2700 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol 2701 assignments may be used: 2702 2703 floating_point = 0; 2704 SECTIONS 2705 { 2706 .text : 2707 { 2708 *(.text) 2709 _etext = .; 2710 } 2711 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3; 2712 .data : { *(.data) } 2713 } 2714 In this example, the symbol `floating_point' will be defined as 2715 zero. The symbol `_etext' will be defined as the address following the 2716 last `.text' input section. The symbol `_bdata' will be defined as the 2717 address following the `.text' output section aligned upward to a 4 byte 2718 boundary. 2719 2720 2721 File: ld.info, Node: PROVIDE, Next: PROVIDE_HIDDEN, Prev: Simple Assignments, Up: Assignments 2722 2723 3.5.2 PROVIDE 2724 ------------- 2725 2726 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol 2727 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in 2728 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol `etext'. 2729 However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use `etext' as a 2730 function name without encountering an error. The `PROVIDE' keyword may 2731 be used to define a symbol, such as `etext', only if it is referenced 2732 but not defined. The syntax is `PROVIDE(SYMBOL = EXPRESSION)'. 2733 2734 Here is an example of using `PROVIDE' to define `etext': 2735 SECTIONS 2736 { 2737 .text : 2738 { 2739 *(.text) 2740 _etext = .; 2741 PROVIDE(etext = .); 2742 } 2743 } 2744 2745 In this example, if the program defines `_etext' (with a leading 2746 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on 2747 the other hand, the program defines `etext' (with no leading 2748 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program. 2749 If the program references `etext' but does not define it, the linker 2750 will use the definition in the linker script. 2751 2752 2753 File: ld.info, Node: PROVIDE_HIDDEN, Next: Source Code Reference, Prev: PROVIDE, Up: Assignments 2754 2755 3.5.3 PROVIDE_HIDDEN 2756 -------------------- 2757 2758 Similar to `PROVIDE'. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be 2759 hidden and won't be exported. 2760 2761 2762 File: ld.info, Node: Source Code Reference, Prev: PROVIDE_HIDDEN, Up: Assignments 2763 2764 3.5.4 Source Code Reference 2765 --------------------------- 2766 2767 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not 2768 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to a 2769 variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a symbol 2770 that does not have a value. 2771 2772 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often 2773 transform names in the source code into different names when they are 2774 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly 2775 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive `name 2776 mangling'. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name of 2777 a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same 2778 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a 2779 linker script variable might be referred to as: 2780 2781 extern int foo; 2782 2783 But in the linker script it might be defined as: 2784 2785 _foo = 1000; 2786 2787 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name 2788 transformation has taken place. 2789 2790 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two 2791 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space in 2792 the program's memory to hold the _value_ of the symbol. The second is 2793 that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol table which 2794 holds the symbol's _address_. ie the symbol table contains the address 2795 of the block of memory holding the symbol's value. So for example the 2796 following C declaration, at file scope: 2797 2798 int foo = 1000; 2799 2800 creates a entry called `foo' in the symbol table. This entry holds 2801 the address of an `int' sized block of memory where the number 1000 is 2802 initially stored. 2803 2804 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that 2805 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's 2806 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block. 2807 So: 2808 2809 foo = 1; 2810 2811 looks up the symbol `foo' in the symbol table, gets the address 2812 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that 2813 address. Whereas: 2814 2815 int * a = & foo; 2816 2817 looks up the symbol `foo' in the symbol table, gets it address and 2818 then copies this address into the block of memory associated with the 2819 variable `a'. 2820 2821 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in 2822 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are 2823 an address without a value. So for example the linker script 2824 definition: 2825 2826 foo = 1000; 2827 2828 creates an entry in the symbol table called `foo' which holds the 2829 address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at 2830 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the _value_ of a 2831 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is 2832 access the _address_ of a linker script defined symbol. 2833 2834 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source 2835 code you should always take the address of the symbol, and never 2836 attempt to use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the 2837 contents of a section of memory called .ROM into a section called 2838 .FLASH and the linker script contains these declarations: 2839 2840 start_of_ROM = .ROM; 2841 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1; 2842 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH; 2843 2844 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be: 2845 2846 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH; 2847 2848 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM); 2849 2850 Note the use of the `&' operators. These are correct. 2851 2852 2853 File: ld.info, Node: SECTIONS, Next: MEMORY, Prev: Assignments, Up: Scripts 2854 2855 3.6 SECTIONS Command 2856 ==================== 2857 2858 The `SECTIONS' command tells the linker how to map input sections into 2859 output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory. 2860 2861 The format of the `SECTIONS' command is: 2862 SECTIONS 2863 { 2864 SECTIONS-COMMAND 2865 SECTIONS-COMMAND 2866 ... 2867 } 2868 2869 Each SECTIONS-COMMAND may of be one of the following: 2870 2871 * an `ENTRY' command (*note Entry command: Entry Point.) 2872 2873 * a symbol assignment (*note Assignments::) 2874 2875 * an output section description 2876 2877 * an overlay description 2878 2879 The `ENTRY' command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the 2880 `SECTIONS' command for convenience in using the location counter in 2881 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to 2882 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in 2883 the layout of the output file. 2884 2885 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described 2886 below. 2887 2888 If you do not use a `SECTIONS' command in your linker script, the 2889 linker will place each input section into an identically named output 2890 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the 2891 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for 2892 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order 2893 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero. 2894 2895 * Menu: 2896 2897 * Output Section Description:: Output section description 2898 * Output Section Name:: Output section name 2899 * Output Section Address:: Output section address 2900 * Input Section:: Input section description 2901 * Output Section Data:: Output section data 2902 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords 2903 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding 2904 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes 2905 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description 2906 2907 2908 File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Description, Next: Output Section Name, Up: SECTIONS 2909 2910 3.6.1 Output Section Description 2911 -------------------------------- 2912 2913 The full description of an output section looks like this: 2914 SECTION [ADDRESS] [(TYPE)] : 2915 [AT(LMA)] 2916 [ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN)] 2917 [SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN)] 2918 [CONSTRAINT] 2919 { 2920 OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND 2921 OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND 2922 ... 2923 } [>REGION] [AT>LMA_REGION] [:PHDR :PHDR ...] [=FILLEXP] 2924 2925 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section 2926 attributes. 2927 2928 The whitespace around SECTION is required, so that the section name 2929 is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required. The 2930 line breaks and other white space are optional. 2931 2932 Each OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND may be one of the following: 2933 2934 * a symbol assignment (*note Assignments::) 2935 2936 * an input section description (*note Input Section::) 2937 2938 * data values to include directly (*note Output Section Data::) 2939 2940 * a special output section keyword (*note Output Section Keywords::) 2941 2942 2943 File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Name, Next: Output Section Address, Prev: Output Section Description, Up: SECTIONS 2944 2945 3.6.2 Output Section Name 2946 ------------------------- 2947 2948 The name of the output section is SECTION. SECTION must meet the 2949 constraints of your output format. In formats which only support a 2950 limited number of sections, such as `a.out', the name must be one of 2951 the names supported by the format (`a.out', for example, allows only 2952 `.text', `.data' or `.bss'). If the output format supports any number 2953 of sections, but with numbers and not names (as is the case for Oasys), 2954 the name should be supplied as a quoted numeric string. A section name 2955 may consist of any sequence of characters, but a name which contains 2956 any unusual characters such as commas must be quoted. 2957 2958 The output section name `/DISCARD/' is special; *Note Output Section 2959 Discarding::. 2960 2961 2962 File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Address, Next: Input Section, Prev: Output Section Name, Up: SECTIONS 2963 2964 3.6.3 Output Section Address 2965 ---------------------------- 2966 2967 The ADDRESS is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory address) 2968 of the output section. If you do not provide ADDRESS, the linker will 2969 set it based on REGION if present, or otherwise based on the current 2970 value of the location counter. 2971 2972 If you provide ADDRESS, the address of the output section will be 2973 set to precisely that. If you provide neither ADDRESS nor REGION, then 2974 the address of the output section will be set to the current value of 2975 the location counter aligned to the alignment requirements of the 2976 output section. The alignment requirement of the output section is the 2977 strictest alignment of any input section contained within the output 2978 section. 2979 2980 For example, 2981 .text . : { *(.text) } 2982 and 2983 .text : { *(.text) } 2984 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the `.text' 2985 output section to the current value of the location counter. The 2986 second will set it to the current value of the location counter aligned 2987 to the strictest alignment of a `.text' input section. 2988 2989 The ADDRESS may be an arbitrary expression; *Note Expressions::. 2990 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary, 2991 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could 2992 do something like this: 2993 .text ALIGN(0x10) : { *(.text) } 2994 This works because `ALIGN' returns the current location counter 2995 aligned upward to the specified value. 2996 2997 Specifying ADDRESS for a section will change the value of the 2998 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty 2999 sections are ignored). 3000 3001 3002 File: ld.info, Node: Input Section, Next: Output Section Data, Prev: Output Section Address, Up: SECTIONS 3003 3004 3.6.4 Input Section Description 3005 ------------------------------- 3006 3007 The most common output section command is an input section description. 3008 3009 The input section description is the most basic linker script 3010 operation. You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out 3011 your program in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the 3012 linker how to map the input files into your memory layout. 3013 3014 * Menu: 3015 3016 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics 3017 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns 3018 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols 3019 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection 3020 * Input Section Example:: Input section example 3021 3022 3023 File: ld.info, Node: Input Section Basics, Next: Input Section Wildcards, Up: Input Section 3024 3025 3.6.4.1 Input Section Basics 3026 ............................ 3027 3028 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed 3029 by a list of section names in parentheses. 3030 3031 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we 3032 describe further below (*note Input Section Wildcards::). 3033 3034 The most common input section description is to include all input 3035 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to 3036 include all input `.text' sections, you would write: 3037 *(.text) 3038 Here the `*' is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude 3039 a list of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may 3040 be used to match all files except the ones specified in the 3041 EXCLUDE_FILE list. For example: 3042 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors) 3043 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except `crtend.o' and 3044 `otherfile.o' to be included. 3045 3046 There are two ways to include more than one section: 3047 *(.text .rdata) 3048 *(.text) *(.rdata) 3049 The difference between these is the order in which the `.text' and 3050 `.rdata' input sections will appear in the output section. In the 3051 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as 3052 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all `.text' 3053 input sections will appear first, followed by all `.rdata' input 3054 sections. 3055 3056 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular 3057 file. You would do this if one or more of your files contain special 3058 data that needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example: 3059 data.o(.data) 3060 3061 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern 3062 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file, with 3063 no whitespace around the colon. 3064 3065 `archive:file' 3066 matches file within archive 3067 3068 `archive:' 3069 matches the whole archive 3070 3071 `:file' 3072 matches file but not one in an archive 3073 3074 Either one or both of `archive' and `file' can contain shell 3075 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a 3076 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so `c:myfile.o' 3077 is a simple file specification, not `myfile.o' within an archive called 3078 `c'. `archive:file' filespecs may also be used within an 3079 `EXCLUDE_FILE' list, but may not appear in other linker script 3080 contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file from an archive by 3081 using `archive:file' in an `INPUT' command. 3082 3083 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections 3084 in the input file will be included in the output section. This is not 3085 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example: 3086 data.o 3087 3088 When you use a file name which is not an `archive:file' specifier 3089 and does not contain any wild card characters, the linker will first 3090 see if you also specified the file name on the linker command line or 3091 in an `INPUT' command. If you did not, the linker will attempt to open 3092 the file as an input file, as though it appeared on the command line. 3093 Note that this differs from an `INPUT' command, because the linker will 3094 not search for the file in the archive search path. 3095 3096 3097 File: ld.info, Node: Input Section Wildcards, Next: Input Section Common, Prev: Input Section Basics, Up: Input Section 3098 3099 3.6.4.2 Input Section Wildcard Patterns 3100 ....................................... 3101 3102 In an input section description, either the file name or the section 3103 name or both may be wildcard patterns. 3104 3105 The file name of `*' seen in many examples is a simple wildcard 3106 pattern for the file name. 3107 3108 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell. 3109 3110 `*' 3111 matches any number of characters 3112 3113 `?' 3114 matches any single character 3115 3116 `[CHARS]' 3117 matches a single instance of any of the CHARS; the `-' character 3118 may be used to specify a range of characters, as in `[a-z]' to 3119 match any lower case letter 3120 3121 `\' 3122 quotes the following character 3123 3124 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters 3125 will not match a `/' character (used to separate directory names on 3126 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single `*' character is an exception; 3127 it will always match any file name, whether it contains a `/' or not. 3128 In a section name, the wildcard characters will match a `/' character. 3129 3130 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly 3131 specified on the command line or in an `INPUT' command. The linker 3132 does not search directories to expand wildcards. 3133 3134 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file 3135 name appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the 3136 linker will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this 3137 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the 3138 `data.o' rule will not be used: 3139 .data : { *(.data) } 3140 .data1 : { data.o(.data) } 3141 3142 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by 3143 wildcards in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can 3144 change this by using the `SORT_BY_NAME' keyword, which appears before a 3145 wildcard pattern in parentheses (e.g., `SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)'). When 3146 the `SORT_BY_NAME' keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or 3147 sections into ascending order by name before placing them in the output 3148 file. 3149 3150 `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' is very similar to `SORT_BY_NAME'. The 3151 difference is `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' will sort sections into ascending 3152 order by alignment before placing them in the output file. 3153 3154 `SORT' is an alias for `SORT_BY_NAME'. 3155 3156 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, 3157 there can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands. 3158 3159 1. `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section pattern)). 3160 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment 3161 if 2 sections have the same name. 3162 3163 2. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)). 3164 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name 3165 if 2 sections have the same alignment. 3166 3167 3. `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)) is 3168 treated the same as `SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern). 3169 3170 4. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section 3171 pattern)) is treated the same as `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard 3172 section pattern). 3173 3174 5. All other nested section sorting commands are invalid. 3175 3176 When both command line section sorting option and linker script 3177 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always takes 3178 precedence over the command line option. 3179 3180 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the 3181 command line option will make the section sorting command to be treated 3182 as nested sorting command. 3183 3184 1. `SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern ) with `--sort-sections 3185 alignment' is equivalent to `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' 3186 (wildcard section pattern)). 3187 3188 2. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section pattern) with 3189 `--sort-section name' is equivalent to `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' 3190 (`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)). 3191 3192 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the 3193 command line option will be ignored. 3194 3195 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use 3196 the `-M' linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows 3197 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections. 3198 3199 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition 3200 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all `.text' 3201 sections in `.text' and all `.bss' sections in `.bss'. The linker will 3202 place the `.data' section from all files beginning with an upper case 3203 character in `.DATA'; for all other files, the linker will place the 3204 `.data' section in `.data'. 3205 SECTIONS { 3206 .text : { *(.text) } 3207 .DATA : { [A-Z]*(.data) } 3208 .data : { *(.data) } 3209 .bss : { *(.bss) } 3210 } 3211 3212 3213 File: ld.info, Node: Input Section Common, Next: Input Section Keep, Prev: Input Section Wildcards, Up: Input Section 3214 3215 3.6.4.3 Input Section for Common Symbols 3216 ........................................ 3217 3218 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object 3219 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The 3220 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section 3221 named `COMMON'. 3222 3223 You may use file names with the `COMMON' section just as with any 3224 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a 3225 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other 3226 input files are placed in another section. 3227 3228 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the 3229 `.bss' section in the output file. For example: 3230 .bss { *(.bss) *(COMMON) } 3231 3232 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. 3233 For example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard 3234 common symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will 3235 use a different special section name for other types of common symbols. 3236 In the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses `COMMON' for standard common 3237 symbols and `.scommon' for small common symbols. This permits you to 3238 map the different types of common symbols into memory at different 3239 locations. 3240 3241 You will sometimes see `[COMMON]' in old linker scripts. This 3242 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to `*(COMMON)'. 3243 3244 3245 File: ld.info, Node: Input Section Keep, Next: Input Section Example, Prev: Input Section Common, Up: Input Section 3246 3247 3.6.4.4 Input Section and Garbage Collection 3248 ............................................ 3249 3250 When link-time garbage collection is in use (`--gc-sections'), it is 3251 often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated. This is 3252 accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry with 3253 `KEEP()', as in `KEEP(*(.init))' or `KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))'. 3254 3255 3256 File: ld.info, Node: Input Section Example, Prev: Input Section Keep, Up: Input Section 3257 3258 3.6.4.5 Input Section Example 3259 ............................. 3260 3261 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker 3262 to read all of the sections from file `all.o' and place them at the 3263 start of output section `outputa' which starts at location `0x10000'. 3264 All of section `.input1' from file `foo.o' follows immediately, in the 3265 same output section. All of section `.input2' from `foo.o' goes into 3266 output section `outputb', followed by section `.input1' from `foo1.o'. 3267 All of the remaining `.input1' and `.input2' sections from any files 3268 are written to output section `outputc'. 3269 3270 SECTIONS { 3271 outputa 0x10000 : 3272 { 3273 all.o 3274 foo.o (.input1) 3275 } 3276 outputb : 3277 { 3278 foo.o (.input2) 3279 foo1.o (.input1) 3280 } 3281 outputc : 3282 { 3283 *(.input1) 3284 *(.input2) 3285 } 3286 } 3287 3288 3289 File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Data, Next: Output Section Keywords, Prev: Input Section, Up: SECTIONS 3290 3291 3.6.5 Output Section Data 3292 ------------------------- 3293 3294 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using 3295 `BYTE', `SHORT', `LONG', `QUAD', or `SQUAD' as an output section 3296 command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in parentheses 3297 providing the value to store (*note Expressions::). The value of the 3298 expression is stored at the current value of the location counter. 3299 3300 The `BYTE', `SHORT', `LONG', and `QUAD' commands store one, two, 3301 four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the bytes, the 3302 location counter is incremented by the number of bytes stored. 3303 3304 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte 3305 value of the symbol `addr': 3306 BYTE(1) 3307 LONG(addr) 3308 3309 When using a 64 bit host or target, `QUAD' and `SQUAD' are the same; 3310 they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and target 3311 are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case `QUAD' 3312 stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and `SQUAD' stores a 32 3313 bit value sign extended to 64 bits. 3314 3315 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit 3316 endianness, which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that 3317 endianness. When the object file format does not have an explicit 3318 endianness, as is true of, for example, S-records, the value will be 3319 stored in the endianness of the first input object file. 3320 3321 Note--these commands only work inside a section description and not 3322 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker: 3323 SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } LONG(1) .data : { *(.data) } } 3324 whereas this will work: 3325 SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) ; LONG(1) } .data : { *(.data) } } 3326 3327 You may use the `FILL' command to set the fill pattern for the 3328 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any 3329 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example, 3330 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled 3331 with the value of the expression, repeated as necessary. A `FILL' 3332 statement covers memory locations after the point at which it occurs in 3333 the section definition; by including more than one `FILL' statement, 3334 you can have different fill patterns in different parts of an output 3335 section. 3336 3337 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the 3338 value `0x90': 3339 FILL(0x90909090) 3340 3341 The `FILL' command is similar to the `=FILLEXP' output section 3342 attribute, but it only affects the part of the section following the 3343 `FILL' command, rather than the entire section. If both are used, the 3344 `FILL' command takes precedence. *Note Output Section Fill::, for 3345 details on the fill expression. 3346 3347 3348 File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Keywords, Next: Output Section Discarding, Prev: Output Section Data, Up: SECTIONS 3349 3350 3.6.6 Output Section Keywords 3351 ----------------------------- 3352 3353 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section 3354 commands. 3355 3356 `CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS' 3357 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input 3358 file. The name of each symbol will be the name of the 3359 corresponding input file. The section of each symbol will be the 3360 output section in which the `CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS' command 3361 appears. 3362 3363 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not 3364 normally used for any other object file format. 3365 3366 `CONSTRUCTORS' 3367 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an 3368 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and 3369 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support 3370 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will 3371 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by 3372 name. For these object file formats, the `CONSTRUCTORS' command 3373 tells the linker to place constructor information in the output 3374 section where the `CONSTRUCTORS' command appears. The 3375 `CONSTRUCTORS' command is ignored for other object file formats. 3376 3377 The symbol `__CTOR_LIST__' marks the start of the global 3378 constructors, and the symbol `__CTOR_END__' marks the end. 3379 Similarly, `__DTOR_LIST__' and `__DTOR_END__' mark the start and 3380 end of the global destructors. The first word in the list is the 3381 number of entries, followed by the address of each constructor or 3382 destructor, followed by a zero word. The compiler must arrange to 3383 actually run the code. For these object file formats GNU C++ 3384 normally calls constructors from a subroutine `__main'; a call to 3385 `__main' is automatically inserted into the startup code for 3386 `main'. GNU C++ normally runs destructors either by using 3387 `atexit', or directly from the function `exit'. 3388 3389 For object file formats such as `COFF' or `ELF' which support 3390 arbitrary section names, GNU C++ will normally arrange to put the 3391 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the `.ctors' 3392 and `.dtors' sections. Placing the following sequence into your 3393 linker script will build the sort of table which the GNU C++ 3394 runtime code expects to see. 3395 3396 __CTOR_LIST__ = .; 3397 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2) 3398 *(.ctors) 3399 LONG(0) 3400 __CTOR_END__ = .; 3401 __DTOR_LIST__ = .; 3402 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2) 3403 *(.dtors) 3404 LONG(0) 3405 __DTOR_END__ = .; 3406 3407 If you are using the GNU C++ support for initialization priority, 3408 which provides some control over the order in which global 3409 constructors are run, you must sort the constructors at link time 3410 to ensure that they are executed in the correct order. When using 3411 the `CONSTRUCTORS' command, use `SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)' 3412 instead. When using the `.ctors' and `.dtors' sections, use 3413 `*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))' and `*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))' instead of 3414 just `*(.ctors)' and `*(.dtors)'. 3415 3416 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues 3417 automatically, and you will not need to concern yourself with 3418 them. However, you may need to consider this if you are using C++ 3419 and writing your own linker scripts. 3420 3421 3422 3423 File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Discarding, Next: Output Section Attributes, Prev: Output Section Keywords, Up: SECTIONS 3424 3425 3.6.7 Output Section Discarding 3426 ------------------------------- 3427 3428 The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is 3429 for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not be 3430 present in any of the input files. For example: 3431 .foo : { *(.foo) } 3432 will only create a `.foo' section in the output file if there is a 3433 `.foo' section in at least one input file, and if the input sections 3434 are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate space in 3435 an output section will also create the output section. 3436 3437 The linker will ignore address assignments (*note Output Section 3438 Address::) on discarded output sections, except when the linker script 3439 defines symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will 3440 obey the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the 3441 section is discarded. 3442 3443 The special output section name `/DISCARD/' may be used to discard 3444 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output 3445 section named `/DISCARD/' are not included in the output file. 3446 3447 3448 File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Attributes, Next: Overlay Description, Prev: Output Section Discarding, Up: SECTIONS 3449 3450 3.6.8 Output Section Attributes 3451 ------------------------------- 3452 3453 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked 3454 like this: 3455 3456 SECTION [ADDRESS] [(TYPE)] : 3457 [AT(LMA)] 3458 [ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN)] 3459 [SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN)] 3460 [CONSTRAINT] 3461 { 3462 OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND 3463 OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND 3464 ... 3465 } [>REGION] [AT>LMA_REGION] [:PHDR :PHDR ...] [=FILLEXP] 3466 3467 We've already described SECTION, ADDRESS, and 3468 OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND. In this section we will describe the remaining 3469 section attributes. 3470 3471 * Menu: 3472 3473 * Output Section Type:: Output section type 3474 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA 3475 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment 3476 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment 3477 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint 3478 * Output Section Region:: Output section region 3479 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr 3480 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill 3481 3482 3483 File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Type, Next: Output Section LMA, Up: Output Section Attributes 3484 3485 3.6.8.1 Output Section Type 3486 ........................... 3487 3488 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in 3489 parentheses. The following types are defined: 3490 3491 `NOLOAD' 3492 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not 3493 be loaded into memory when the program is run. 3494 3495 `DSECT' 3496 `COPY' 3497 `INFO' 3498 `OVERLAY' 3499 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are 3500 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be 3501 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the 3502 section when the program is run. 3503 3504 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on 3505 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using 3506 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the `ROM' 3507 section is addressed at memory location `0' and does not need to be 3508 loaded when the program is run. The contents of the `ROM' section will 3509 appear in the linker output file as usual. 3510 SECTIONS { 3511 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : { ... } 3512 ... 3513 } 3514 3515 3516 File: ld.info, Node: Output Section LMA, Next: Forced Output Alignment, Prev: Output Section Type, Up: Output Section Attributes 3517 3518 3.6.8.2 Output Section LMA 3519 .......................... 3520 3521 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see 3522 *Note Basic Script Concepts::. The address expression which may appear 3523 in an output section description sets the VMA (*note Output Section 3524 Address::). 3525 3526 The expression LMA that follows the `AT' keyword specifies the load 3527 address of the section. 3528 3529 Alternatively, with `AT>LMA_REGION' expression, you may specify a 3530 memory region for the section's load address. *Note MEMORY::. Note 3531 that if the section has not had a VMA assigned to it then the linker 3532 will use the LMA_REGION as the VMA region as well. 3533 3534 If neither `AT' nor `AT>' is specified for an allocatable section, 3535 the linker will set the LMA such that the difference between VMA and 3536 LMA for the section is the same as the preceding output section in the 3537 same region. If there is no preceding output section or the section is 3538 not allocatable, the linker will set the LMA equal to the VMA. *Note 3539 Output Section Region::. 3540 3541 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For 3542 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one 3543 called `.text', which starts at `0x1000', one called `.mdata', which is 3544 loaded at the end of the `.text' section even though its VMA is 3545 `0x2000', and one called `.bss' to hold uninitialized data at address 3546 `0x3000'. The symbol `_data' is defined with the value `0x2000', which 3547 shows that the location counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value. 3548 3549 SECTIONS 3550 { 3551 .text 0x1000 : { *(.text) _etext = . ; } 3552 .mdata 0x2000 : 3553 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) ) 3554 { _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; } 3555 .bss 0x3000 : 3556 { _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;} 3557 } 3558 3559 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated 3560 with this linker script would include something like the following, to 3561 copy the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. 3562 Notice how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the 3563 linker script. 3564 3565 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend; 3566 char *src = &_etext; 3567 char *dst = &_data; 3568 3569 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */ 3570 while (dst < &_edata) { 3571 *dst++ = *src++; 3572 } 3573 3574 /* Zero bss */ 3575 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++) 3576 *dst = 0; 3577 3578 3579 File: ld.info, Node: Forced Output Alignment, Next: Forced Input Alignment, Prev: Output Section LMA, Up: Output Section Attributes 3580 3581 3.6.8.3 Forced Output Alignment 3582 ............................... 3583 3584 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. 3585 3586 3587 File: ld.info, Node: Forced Input Alignment, Next: Output Section Constraint, Prev: Forced Output Alignment, Up: Output Section Attributes 3588 3589 3.6.8.4 Forced Input Alignment 3590 .............................. 3591 3592 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using 3593 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input 3594 sections, whether larger or smaller. 3595 3596 3597 File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Constraint, Next: Output Section Region, Prev: Forced Input Alignment, Up: Output Section Attributes 3598 3599 3.6.8.5 Output Section Constraint 3600 ................................. 3601 3602 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all of 3603 its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are 3604 read-write by using the keyword `ONLY_IF_RO' and `ONLY_IF_RW' 3605 respectively. 3606 3607 3608 File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Region, Next: Output Section Phdr, Prev: Output Section Constraint, Up: Output Section Attributes 3609 3610 3.6.8.6 Output Section Region 3611 ............................. 3612 3613 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by 3614 using `>REGION'. *Note MEMORY::. 3615 3616 Here is a simple example: 3617 MEMORY { rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 } 3618 SECTIONS { ROM : { *(.text) } >rom } 3619 3620 3621 File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Phdr, Next: Output Section Fill, Prev: Output Section Region, Up: Output Section Attributes 3622 3623 3.6.8.7 Output Section Phdr 3624 ........................... 3625 3626 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by 3627 using `:PHDR'. *Note PHDRS::. If a section is assigned to one or more 3628 segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be assigned to 3629 those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly `:PHDR' modifier. 3630 You can use `:NONE' to tell the linker to not put the section in any 3631 segment at all. 3632 3633 Here is a simple example: 3634 PHDRS { text PT_LOAD ; } 3635 SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } :text } 3636 3637 3638 File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Fill, Prev: Output Section Phdr, Up: Output Section Attributes 3639 3640 3.6.8.8 Output Section Fill 3641 ........................... 3642 3643 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using `=FILLEXP'. 3644 FILLEXP is an expression (*note Expressions::). Any otherwise 3645 unspecified regions of memory within the output section (for example, 3646 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) will be 3647 filled with the value, repeated as necessary. If the fill expression 3648 is a simple hex number, ie. a string of hex digit starting with `0x' 3649 and without a trailing `k' or `M', then an arbitrarily long sequence of 3650 hex digits can be used to specify the fill pattern; Leading zeros 3651 become part of the pattern too. For all other cases, including extra 3652 parentheses or a unary `+', the fill pattern is the four least 3653 significant bytes of the value of the expression. In all cases, the 3654 number is big-endian. 3655 3656 You can also change the fill value with a `FILL' command in the 3657 output section commands; (*note Output Section Data::). 3658 3659 Here is a simple example: 3660 SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } =0x90909090 } 3661 3662 3663 File: ld.info, Node: Overlay Description, Prev: Output Section Attributes, Up: SECTIONS 3664 3665 3.6.9 Overlay Description 3666 ------------------------- 3667 3668 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which 3669 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at 3670 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will 3671 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as 3672 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach 3673 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster 3674 than another. 3675 3676 Overlays are described using the `OVERLAY' command. The `OVERLAY' 3677 command is used within a `SECTIONS' command, like an output section 3678 description. The full syntax of the `OVERLAY' command is as follows: 3679 OVERLAY [START] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( LDADDR )] 3680 { 3681 SECNAME1 3682 { 3683 OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND 3684 OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND 3685 ... 3686 } [:PHDR...] [=FILL] 3687 SECNAME2 3688 { 3689 OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND 3690 OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND 3691 ... 3692 } [:PHDR...] [=FILL] 3693 ... 3694 } [>REGION] [:PHDR...] [=FILL] 3695 3696 Everything is optional except `OVERLAY' (a keyword), and each 3697 section must have a name (SECNAME1 and SECNAME2 above). The section 3698 definitions within the `OVERLAY' construct are identical to those 3699 within the general `SECTIONS' contruct (*note SECTIONS::), except that 3700 no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for sections within 3701 an `OVERLAY'. 3702 3703 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The 3704 load addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are 3705 consecutive in memory starting at the load address used for the 3706 `OVERLAY' as a whole (as with normal section definitions, the load 3707 address is optional, and defaults to the start address; the start 3708 address is also optional, and defaults to the current value of the 3709 location counter). 3710 3711 If the `NOCROSSREFS' keyword is used, and there any references among 3712 the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections all 3713 run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one 3714 section to refer directly to another. *Note NOCROSSREFS: Miscellaneous 3715 Commands. 3716 3717 For each section within the `OVERLAY', the linker automatically 3718 provides two symbols. The symbol `__load_start_SECNAME' is defined as 3719 the starting load address of the section. The symbol 3720 `__load_stop_SECNAME' is defined as the final load address of the 3721 section. Any characters within SECNAME which are not legal within C 3722 identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these symbols 3723 to move the overlaid sections around as necessary. 3724 3725 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set 3726 to the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest 3727 section. 3728 3729 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a 3730 `SECTIONS' construct. 3731 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) 3732 { 3733 .text0 { o1/*.o(.text) } 3734 .text1 { o2/*.o(.text) } 3735 } 3736 This will define both `.text0' and `.text1' to start at address 3737 0x1000. `.text0' will be loaded at address 0x4000, and `.text1' will 3738 be loaded immediately after `.text0'. The following symbols will be 3739 defined if referenced: `__load_start_text0', `__load_stop_text0', 3740 `__load_start_text1', `__load_stop_text1'. 3741 3742 C code to copy overlay `.text1' into the overlay area might look 3743 like the following. 3744 3745 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1; 3746 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1, 3747 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1); 3748 3749 Note that the `OVERLAY' command is just syntactic sugar, since 3750 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above 3751 example could have been written identically as follows. 3752 3753 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) { o1/*.o(.text) } 3754 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0)); 3755 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0)); 3756 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) { o2/*.o(.text) } 3757 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1)); 3758 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1)); 3759 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1)); 3760 3761 3762 File: ld.info, Node: MEMORY, Next: PHDRS, Prev: SECTIONS, Up: Scripts 3763 3764 3.7 MEMORY Command 3765 ================== 3766 3767 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available 3768 memory. You can override this by using the `MEMORY' command. 3769 3770 The `MEMORY' command describes the location and size of blocks of 3771 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions 3772 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You 3773 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will 3774 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about 3775 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections 3776 around to fit into the available regions. 3777 3778 A linker script may contain at most one use of the `MEMORY' command. 3779 However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as you 3780 wish. The syntax is: 3781 MEMORY 3782 { 3783 NAME [(ATTR)] : ORIGIN = ORIGIN, LENGTH = LEN 3784 ... 3785 } 3786 3787 The NAME is a name used in the linker script to refer to the region. 3788 The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script. Region 3789 names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict with 3790 symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region must 3791 have a distinct name within the `MEMORY' command. However you can add 3792 later alias names to existing memory regions with the *Note 3793 REGION_ALIAS:: command. 3794 3795 The ATTR string is an optional list of attributes that specify 3796 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is 3797 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in *Note 3798 SECTIONS::, if you do not specify an output section for some input 3799 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as 3800 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use 3801 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates. 3802 3803 The ATTR string must consist only of the following characters: 3804 `R' 3805 Read-only section 3806 3807 `W' 3808 Read/write section 3809 3810 `X' 3811 Executable section 3812 3813 `A' 3814 Allocatable section 3815 3816 `I' 3817 Initialized section 3818 3819 `L' 3820 Same as `I' 3821 3822 `!' 3823 Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes 3824 3825 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than 3826 `!', it will be placed in the memory region. The `!' attribute 3827 reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed in the 3828 memory region only if it does not match any of the listed attributes. 3829 3830 The ORIGIN is an numerical expression for the start address of the 3831 memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it 3832 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword `ORIGIN' may be abbreviated to 3833 `org' or `o' (but not, for example, `ORG'). 3834 3835 The LEN is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory region. 3836 As with the ORIGIN expression, the expression must be numerical only 3837 and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword `LENGTH' may be 3838 abbreviated to `len' or `l'. 3839 3840 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory 3841 regions available for allocation: one starting at `0' for 256 kilobytes, 3842 and the other starting at `0x40000000' for four megabytes. The linker 3843 will place into the `rom' memory region every section which is not 3844 explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only or 3845 executable. The linker will place other sections which are not 3846 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the `ram' memory region. 3847 3848 MEMORY 3849 { 3850 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K 3851 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M 3852 } 3853 3854 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place 3855 specific output sections into that memory region by using the `>REGION' 3856 output section attribute. For example, if you have a memory region 3857 named `mem', you would use `>mem' in the output section definition. 3858 *Note Output Section Region::. If no address was specified for the 3859 output section, the linker will set the address to the next available 3860 address within the memory region. If the combined output sections 3861 directed to a memory region are too large for the region, the linker 3862 will issue an error message. 3863 3864 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an 3865 expression via the `ORIGIN(MEMORY)' and `LENGTH(MEMORY)' functions: 3866 3867 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4; 3868 3869 3870 File: ld.info, Node: PHDRS, Next: VERSION, Prev: MEMORY, Up: Scripts 3871 3872 3.8 PHDRS Command 3873 ================= 3874 3875 The ELF object file format uses "program headers", also knows as 3876 "segments". The program headers describe how the program should be 3877 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the `objdump' 3878 program with the `-p' option. 3879 3880 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader 3881 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the 3882 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly. 3883 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader 3884 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI. 3885 3886 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. 3887 However, in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more 3888 precisely. You may use the `PHDRS' command for this purpose. When the 3889 linker sees the `PHDRS' command in the linker script, it will not 3890 create any program headers other than the ones specified. 3891 3892 The linker only pays attention to the `PHDRS' command when 3893 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply 3894 ignore `PHDRS'. 3895 3896 This is the syntax of the `PHDRS' command. The words `PHDRS', 3897 `FILEHDR', `AT', and `FLAGS' are keywords. 3898 3899 PHDRS 3900 { 3901 NAME TYPE [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( ADDRESS ) ] 3902 [ FLAGS ( FLAGS ) ] ; 3903 } 3904 3905 The NAME is used only for reference in the `SECTIONS' command of the 3906 linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program header 3907 names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict with 3908 symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header must 3909 have a distinct name. 3910 3911 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the 3912 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you 3913 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output 3914 sections in the segments. You use the `:PHDR' output section attribute 3915 to place a section in a particular segment. *Note Output Section 3916 Phdr::. 3917 3918 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This 3919 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may 3920 repeat `:PHDR', using it once for each segment which should contain the 3921 section. 3922 3923 If you place a section in one or more segments using `:PHDR', then 3924 the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do not 3925 specify `:PHDR' in the same segments. This is for convenience, since 3926 generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be placed in a single 3927 segment. You can use `:NONE' to override the default segment and tell 3928 the linker to not put the section in any segment at all. 3929 3930 You may use the `FILEHDR' and `PHDRS' keywords appear after the 3931 program header type to further describe the contents of the segment. 3932 The `FILEHDR' keyword means that the segment should include the ELF 3933 file header. The `PHDRS' keyword means that the segment should include 3934 the ELF program headers themselves. 3935 3936 The TYPE may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the 3937 value of the keyword. 3938 3939 `PT_NULL' (0) 3940 Indicates an unused program header. 3941 3942 `PT_LOAD' (1) 3943 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be 3944 loaded from the file. 3945 3946 `PT_DYNAMIC' (2) 3947 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found. 3948 3949 `PT_INTERP' (3) 3950 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may 3951 be found. 3952 3953 `PT_NOTE' (4) 3954 Indicates a segment holding note information. 3955 3956 `PT_SHLIB' (5) 3957 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the 3958 ELF ABI. 3959 3960 `PT_PHDR' (6) 3961 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found. 3962 3963 EXPRESSION 3964 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This 3965 may be used for types not defined above. 3966 3967 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular 3968 address in memory by using an `AT' expression. This is identical to the 3969 `AT' command used as an output section attribute (*note Output Section 3970 LMA::). The `AT' command for a program header overrides the output 3971 section attribute. 3972 3973 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections 3974 which comprise the segment. You may use the `FLAGS' keyword to 3975 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of FLAGS must be an 3976 integer. It is used to set the `p_flags' field of the program header. 3977 3978 Here is an example of `PHDRS'. This shows a typical set of program 3979 headers used on a native ELF system. 3980 3981 PHDRS 3982 { 3983 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ; 3984 interp PT_INTERP ; 3985 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ; 3986 data PT_LOAD ; 3987 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ; 3988 } 3989 3990 SECTIONS 3991 { 3992 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS; 3993 .interp : { *(.interp) } :text :interp 3994 .text : { *(.text) } :text 3995 .rodata : { *(.rodata) } /* defaults to :text */ 3996 ... 3997 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */ 3998 .data : { *(.data) } :data 3999 .dynamic : { *(.dynamic) } :data :dynamic 4000 ... 4001 } 4002 4003 4004 File: ld.info, Node: VERSION, Next: Expressions, Prev: PHDRS, Up: Scripts 4005 4006 3.9 VERSION Command 4007 =================== 4008 4009 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are 4010 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use 4011 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs 4012 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the 4013 shared library. 4014 4015 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, 4016 or you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You 4017 can also use the `--version-script' linker option. 4018 4019 The syntax of the `VERSION' command is simply 4020 VERSION { version-script-commands } 4021 4022 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used 4023 by Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of 4024 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the 4025 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which 4026 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local 4027 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared 4028 library. 4029 4030 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a 4031 few examples. 4032 4033 VERS_1.1 { 4034 global: 4035 foo1; 4036 local: 4037 old*; 4038 original*; 4039 new*; 4040 }; 4041 4042 VERS_1.2 { 4043 foo2; 4044 } VERS_1.1; 4045 4046 VERS_2.0 { 4047 bar1; bar2; 4048 extern "C++" { 4049 ns::*; 4050 "int f(int, double)"; 4051 } 4052 } VERS_1.2; 4053 4054 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first 4055 version node defined is `VERS_1.1'; it has no other dependencies. The 4056 script binds the symbol `foo1' to `VERS_1.1'. It reduces a number of 4057 symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside of the 4058 shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any 4059 symbol whose name begins with `old', `original', or `new' is matched. 4060 The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used in the shell 4061 when matching filenames (also known as "globbing"). However, if you 4062 specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the name is treated 4063 as literal, rather than as a glob pattern. 4064 4065 Next, the version script defines node `VERS_1.2'. This node depends 4066 upon `VERS_1.1'. The script binds the symbol `foo2' to the version 4067 node `VERS_1.2'. 4068 4069 Finally, the version script defines node `VERS_2.0'. This node 4070 depends upon `VERS_1.2'. The scripts binds the symbols `bar1' and 4071 `bar2' are bound to the version node `VERS_2.0'. 4072 4073 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not 4074 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an 4075 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise 4076 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using `global: *;' 4077 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use 4078 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global 4079 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the 4080 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions 4081 ought to have a fixed set of symbols. 4082 4083 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than 4084 what they might suggest to the person reading them. The `2.0' version 4085 could just as well have appeared in between `1.1' and `1.2'. However, 4086 this would be a confusing way to write a version script. 4087 4088 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node in 4089 the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to 4090 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and 4091 which won't. 4092 4093 { global: foo; bar; local: *; }; 4094 4095 When you link an application against a shared library that has 4096 versioned symbols, the application itself knows which version of each 4097 symbol it requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from 4098 each shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic 4099 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have 4100 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the 4101 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this 4102 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that 4103 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to 4104 search for each symbol reference. 4105 4106 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of 4107 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem 4108 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external 4109 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when 4110 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a 4111 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use 4112 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol 4113 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if 4114 the libraries being used with the application are too old. 4115 4116 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The 4117 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the 4118 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning 4119 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library 4120 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like: 4121 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo (a] VERS_1.1"); 4122 in the C source file. This renames the function `original_foo' to 4123 be an alias for `foo' bound to the version node `VERS_1.1'. The 4124 `local:' directive can be used to prevent the symbol `original_foo' 4125 from being exported. A `.symver' directive takes precedence over a 4126 version script. 4127 4128 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same 4129 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make 4130 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major 4131 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications 4132 linked against the old interface to continue to function. 4133 4134 To do this, you must use multiple `.symver' directives in the source 4135 file. Here is an example: 4136 4137 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@"); 4138 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo (a] VERS_1.1"); 4139 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo (a] VERS_1.2"); 4140 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@VERS_2.0"); 4141 4142 In this example, `foo@' represents the symbol `foo' bound to the 4143 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains 4144 this example would define 4 C functions: `original_foo', `old_foo', 4145 `old_foo1', and `new_foo'. 4146 4147 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to 4148 be some way to specify a default version to which external references to 4149 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the `foo@@VERS_2.0' 4150 type of `.symver' directive. You can only declare one version of a 4151 symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise you would effectively 4152 have multiple definitions of the same symbol. 4153 4154 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol 4155 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience 4156 (i.e., `old_foo'), or you can use the `.symver' directive to 4157 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question. 4158 4159 You can also specify the language in the version script: 4160 4161 VERSION extern "lang" { version-script-commands } 4162 4163 The supported `lang's are `C', `C++', and `Java'. The linker will 4164 iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and demangle them 4165 according to `lang' before matching them to the patterns specified in 4166 `version-script-commands'. 4167 4168 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As 4169 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names, 4170 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In 4171 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing 4172 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will 4173 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler might 4174 change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you should 4175 check that all of your version directives are behaving as you expect 4176 when you upgrade. 4177 4178 4179 File: ld.info, Node: Expressions, Next: Implicit Linker Scripts, Prev: VERSION, Up: Scripts 4180 4181 3.10 Expressions in Linker Scripts 4182 ================================== 4183 4184 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to 4185 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All 4186 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the 4187 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits. 4188 4189 You can use and set symbol values in expressions. 4190 4191 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use 4192 in expressions. 4193 4194 * Menu: 4195 4196 * Constants:: Constants 4197 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants 4198 * Symbols:: Symbol Names 4199 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections 4200 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter 4201 * Operators:: Operators 4202 * Evaluation:: Evaluation 4203 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression 4204 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions 4205 4206 4207 File: ld.info, Node: Constants, Next: Symbolic Constants, Up: Expressions 4208 4209 3.10.1 Constants 4210 ---------------- 4211 4212 All constants are integers. 4213 4214 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with `0' to be 4215 octal, and an integer beginning with `0x' or `0X' to be hexadecimal. 4216 Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of `h' or `H' for 4217 hexadeciaml, `o' or `O' for octal, `b' or `B' for binary and `d' or `D' 4218 for decimal. Any integer value without a prefix or a suffix is 4219 considered to be decimal. 4220 4221 In addition, you can use the suffixes `K' and `M' to scale a 4222 constant by `1024' or `1024*1024' respectively. For example, the 4223 following all refer to the same quantity: 4224 4225 _fourk_1 = 4K; 4226 _fourk_2 = 4096; 4227 _fourk_3 = 0x1000; 4228 _fourk_4 = 10000o; 4229 4230 Note - the `K' and `M' suffixes cannot be used in conjunction with 4231 the base suffixes mentioned above. 4232 4233 4234 File: ld.info, Node: Symbolic Constants, Next: Symbols, Prev: Constants, Up: Expressions 4235 4236 3.10.2 Symbolic Constants 4237 ------------------------- 4238 4239 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of the 4240 `CONSTANT(NAME)' operator, where NAME is one of: 4241 4242 `MAXPAGESIZE' 4243 The target's maximum page size. 4244 4245 `COMMONPAGESIZE' 4246 The target's default page size. 4247 4248 So for example: 4249 4250 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : { *(.text) } 4251 4252 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary 4253 supported by the target. 4254 4255 4256 File: ld.info, Node: Symbols, Next: Orphan Sections, Prev: Symbolic Constants, Up: Expressions 4257 4258 3.10.3 Symbol Names 4259 ------------------- 4260 4261 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period 4262 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens. 4263 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can 4264 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a 4265 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes: 4266 "SECTION" = 9; 4267 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10; 4268 4269 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is 4270 safest to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, `A-B' is one 4271 symbol, whereas `A - B' is an expression involving subtraction. 4272 4273 4274 File: ld.info, Node: Orphan Sections, Next: Location Counter, Prev: Symbols, Up: Expressions 4275 4276 3.10.4 Orphan Sections 4277 ---------------------- 4278 4279 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which are not 4280 explicitly placed into the output file by the linker script. The 4281 linker will still copy these sections into the output file, but it has 4282 to guess as to where they should be placed. The linker uses a simple 4283 heuristic to do this. It attempts to place orphan sections after 4284 non-orphan sections of the same attribute, such as code vs data, 4285 loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If there is not enough room to do this 4286 then it places at the end of the file. 4287 4288 For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type 4289 as well as section flag. 4290 4291 If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then 4292 the linker will automatically *note PROVIDE:: two symbols: 4293 __start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the 4294 section. These indicate the start address and end address of the 4295 orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not 4296 representable as C identifiers because they contain a `.' character. 4297 4298 4299 File: ld.info, Node: Location Counter, Next: Operators, Prev: Orphan Sections, Up: Expressions 4300 4301 3.10.5 The Location Counter 4302 --------------------------- 4303 4304 The special linker variable "dot" `.' always contains the current 4305 output location counter. Since the `.' always refers to a location in 4306 an output section, it may only appear in an expression within a 4307 `SECTIONS' command. The `.' symbol may appear anywhere that an 4308 ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression. 4309 4310 Assigning a value to `.' will cause the location counter to be 4311 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The 4312 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section, 4313 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so doing 4314 creates areas with overlapping LMAs. 4315 4316 SECTIONS 4317 { 4318 output : 4319 { 4320 file1(.text) 4321 . = . + 1000; 4322 file2(.text) 4323 . += 1000; 4324 file3(.text) 4325 } = 0x12345678; 4326 } 4327 In the previous example, the `.text' section from `file1' is located 4328 at the beginning of the output section `output'. It is followed by a 4329 1000 byte gap. Then the `.text' section from `file2' appears, also 4330 with a 1000 byte gap following before the `.text' section from `file3'. 4331 The notation `= 0x12345678' specifies what data to write in the gaps 4332 (*note Output Section Fill::). 4333 4334 Note: `.' actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the 4335 current containing object. Normally this is the `SECTIONS' statement, 4336 whose start address is 0, hence `.' can be used as an absolute address. 4337 If `.' is used inside a section description however, it refers to the 4338 byte offset from the start of that section, not an absolute address. 4339 Thus in a script like this: 4340 4341 SECTIONS 4342 { 4343 . = 0x100 4344 .text: { 4345 *(.text) 4346 . = 0x200 4347 } 4348 . = 0x500 4349 .data: { 4350 *(.data) 4351 . += 0x600 4352 } 4353 } 4354 4355 The `.text' section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100 and 4356 a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in the 4357 `.text' input sections to fill this area. (If there is too much data, 4358 an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to move `.' 4359 backwards). The `.data' section will start at 0x500 and it will have 4360 an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of the values from 4361 the `.data' input sections and before the end of the `.data' output 4362 section itself. 4363 4364 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an 4365 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker 4366 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following: 4367 4368 SECTIONS 4369 { 4370 start_of_text = . ; 4371 .text: { *(.text) } 4372 end_of_text = . ; 4373 4374 start_of_data = . ; 4375 .data: { *(.data) } 4376 end_of_data = . ; 4377 } 4378 4379 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. `.rodata', not 4380 mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section between 4381 `.text' and `.data'. You might think the linker should place `.rodata' 4382 on the blank line in the above script, but blank lines are of no 4383 particular significance to the linker. As well, the linker doesn't 4384 associate the above symbol names with their sections. Instead, it 4385 assumes that all assignments or other statements belong to the previous 4386 output section, except for the special case of an assignment to `.'. 4387 I.e., the linker will place the orphan `.rodata' section as if the 4388 script was written as follows: 4389 4390 SECTIONS 4391 { 4392 start_of_text = . ; 4393 .text: { *(.text) } 4394 end_of_text = . ; 4395 4396 start_of_data = . ; 4397 .rodata: { *(.rodata) } 4398 .data: { *(.data) } 4399 end_of_data = . ; 4400 } 4401 4402 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of 4403 `start_of_data'. One way to influence the orphan section placement is 4404 to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker assumes that an 4405 assignment to `.' is setting the start address of a following output 4406 section and thus should be grouped with that section. So you could 4407 write: 4408 4409 SECTIONS 4410 { 4411 start_of_text = . ; 4412 .text: { *(.text) } 4413 end_of_text = . ; 4414 4415 . = . ; 4416 start_of_data = . ; 4417 .data: { *(.data) } 4418 end_of_data = . ; 4419 } 4420 4421 Now, the orphan `.rodata' section will be placed between 4422 `end_of_text' and `start_of_data'. 4423 4424 4425 File: ld.info, Node: Operators, Next: Evaluation, Prev: Location Counter, Up: Expressions 4426 4427 3.10.6 Operators 4428 ---------------- 4429 4430 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with 4431 the standard bindings and precedence levels: 4432 precedence associativity Operators Notes 4433 (highest) 4434 1 left ! - ~ (1) 4435 2 left * / % 4436 3 left + - 4437 4 left >> << 4438 5 left == != > < <= >= 4439 6 left & 4440 7 left | 4441 8 left && 4442 9 left || 4443 10 right ? : 4444 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2) 4445 (lowest) 4446 Notes: (1) Prefix operators (2) *Note Assignments::. 4447 4448 4449 File: ld.info, Node: Evaluation, Next: Expression Section, Prev: Operators, Up: Expressions 4450 4451 3.10.7 Evaluation 4452 ----------------- 4453 4454 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of 4455 an expression when absolutely necessary. 4456 4457 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start 4458 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory 4459 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed 4460 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script. 4461 4462 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed 4463 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when 4464 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available 4465 for use in the symbol assignment expression. 4466 4467 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so 4468 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after 4469 allocation. 4470 4471 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter 4472 `.', must be evaluated during section allocation. 4473 4474 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not 4475 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the 4476 following 4477 SECTIONS 4478 { 4479 .text 9+this_isnt_constant : 4480 { *(.text) } 4481 } 4482 will cause the error message `non constant expression for initial 4483 address'. 4484 4485 4486 File: ld.info, Node: Expression Section, Next: Builtin Functions, Prev: Evaluation, Up: Expressions 4487 4488 3.10.8 The Section of an Expression 4489 ----------------------------------- 4490 4491 When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute 4492 or relative to some section. A relative expression is expressed as a 4493 fixed offset from the base of a section. 4494 4495 The position of the expression within the linker script determines 4496 whether it is absolute or relative. An expression which appears within 4497 an output section definition is relative to the base of the output 4498 section. An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute. 4499 4500 A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you 4501 request relocatable output using the `-r' option. That means that a 4502 further link operation may change the value of the symbol. The symbol's 4503 section will be the section of the relative expression. 4504 4505 A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value 4506 through any further link operation. The symbol will be absolute, and 4507 will not have any particular associated section. 4508 4509 You can use the builtin function `ABSOLUTE' to force an expression 4510 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to 4511 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output 4512 section `.data': 4513 SECTIONS 4514 { 4515 .data : { *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); } 4516 } 4517 If `ABSOLUTE' were not used, `_edata' would be relative to the 4518 `.data' section. 4519 4520 4521 File: ld.info, Node: Builtin Functions, Prev: Expression Section, Up: Expressions 4522 4523 3.10.9 Builtin Functions 4524 ------------------------ 4525 4526 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for 4527 use in linker script expressions. 4528 4529 `ABSOLUTE(EXP)' 4530 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) 4531 value of the expression EXP. Primarily useful to assign an 4532 absolute value to a symbol within a section definition, where 4533 symbol values are normally section relative. *Note Expression 4534 Section::. 4535 4536 `ADDR(SECTION)' 4537 Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named SECTION. Your 4538 script must previously have defined the location of that section. 4539 In the following example, `symbol_1' and `symbol_2' are assigned 4540 identical values: 4541 SECTIONS { ... 4542 .output1 : 4543 { 4544 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.); 4545 ... 4546 } 4547 .output : 4548 { 4549 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1); 4550 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1; 4551 } 4552 ... } 4553 4554 `ALIGN(ALIGN)' 4555 `ALIGN(EXP,ALIGN)' 4556 Return the location counter (`.') or arbitrary expression aligned 4557 to the next ALIGN boundary. The single operand `ALIGN' doesn't 4558 change the value of the location counter--it just does arithmetic 4559 on it. The two operand `ALIGN' allows an arbitrary expression to 4560 be aligned upwards (`ALIGN(ALIGN)' is equivalent to `ALIGN(., 4561 ALIGN)'). 4562 4563 Here is an example which aligns the output `.data' section to the 4564 next `0x2000' byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a 4565 variable within the section to the next `0x8000' boundary after the 4566 input sections: 4567 SECTIONS { ... 4568 .data ALIGN(0x2000): { 4569 *(.data) 4570 variable = ALIGN(0x8000); 4571 } 4572 ... } 4573 The first use of `ALIGN' in this example specifies the 4574 location of a section because it is used as the optional ADDRESS 4575 attribute of a section definition (*note Output Section 4576 Address::). The second use of `ALIGN' is used to defines the 4577 value of a symbol. 4578 4579 The builtin function `NEXT' is closely related to `ALIGN'. 4580 4581 `ALIGNOF(SECTION)' 4582 Return the alignment in bytes of the named SECTION, if that 4583 section has been allocated. If the section has not been allocated 4584 when this is evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the 4585 following example, the alignment of the `.output' section is 4586 stored as the first value in that section. 4587 SECTIONS{ ... 4588 .output { 4589 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output)) 4590 ... 4591 } 4592 ... } 4593 4594 `BLOCK(EXP)' 4595 This is a synonym for `ALIGN', for compatibility with older linker 4596 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an 4597 output section. 4598 4599 `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE, COMMONPAGESIZE)' 4600 This is equivalent to either 4601 (ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE) + (. & (MAXPAGESIZE - 1))) 4602 or 4603 (ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE) + (. & (MAXPAGESIZE - COMMONPAGESIZE))) 4604 depending on whether the latter uses fewer COMMONPAGESIZE sized 4605 pages for the data segment (area between the result of this 4606 expression and `DATA_SEGMENT_END') than the former or not. If the 4607 latter form is used, it means COMMONPAGESIZE bytes of runtime 4608 memory will be saved at the expense of up to COMMONPAGESIZE wasted 4609 bytes in the on-disk file. 4610 4611 This expression can only be used directly in `SECTIONS' commands, 4612 not in any output section descriptions and only once in the linker 4613 script. COMMONPAGESIZE should be less or equal to MAXPAGESIZE and 4614 should be the system page size the object wants to be optimized 4615 for (while still working on system page sizes up to MAXPAGESIZE). 4616 4617 Example: 4618 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000); 4619 4620 `DATA_SEGMENT_END(EXP)' 4621 This defines the end of data segment for `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN' 4622 evaluation purposes. 4623 4624 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.); 4625 4626 `DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(OFFSET, EXP)' 4627 This defines the end of the `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment when `-z relro' 4628 option is used. Second argument is returned. When `-z relro' 4629 option is not present, `DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END' does nothing, 4630 otherwise `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN' is padded so that EXP + OFFSET is 4631 aligned to the most commonly used page boundary for particular 4632 target. If present in the linker script, it must always come in 4633 between `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN' and `DATA_SEGMENT_END'. 4634 4635 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .); 4636 4637 `DEFINED(SYMBOL)' 4638 Return 1 if SYMBOL is in the linker global symbol table and is 4639 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise 4640 return 0. You can use this function to provide default values for 4641 symbols. For example, the following script fragment shows how to 4642 set a global symbol `begin' to the first location in the `.text' 4643 section--but if a symbol called `begin' already existed, its value 4644 is preserved: 4645 4646 SECTIONS { ... 4647 .text : { 4648 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ; 4649 ... 4650 } 4651 ... 4652 } 4653 4654 `LENGTH(MEMORY)' 4655 Return the length of the memory region named MEMORY. 4656 4657 `LOADADDR(SECTION)' 4658 Return the absolute LMA of the named SECTION. This is normally 4659 the same as `ADDR', but it may be different if the `AT' attribute 4660 is used in the output section definition (*note Output Section 4661 LMA::). 4662 4663 `MAX(EXP1, EXP2)' 4664 Returns the maximum of EXP1 and EXP2. 4665 4666 `MIN(EXP1, EXP2)' 4667 Returns the minimum of EXP1 and EXP2. 4668 4669 `NEXT(EXP)' 4670 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of EXP. 4671 This function is closely related to `ALIGN(EXP)'; unless you use 4672 the `MEMORY' command to define discontinuous memory for the output 4673 file, the two functions are equivalent. 4674 4675 `ORIGIN(MEMORY)' 4676 Return the origin of the memory region named MEMORY. 4677 4678 `SEGMENT_START(SEGMENT, DEFAULT)' 4679 Return the base address of the named SEGMENT. If an explicit 4680 value has been given for this segment (with a command-line `-T' 4681 option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be 4682 DEFAULT. At present, the `-T' command-line option can only be 4683 used to set the base address for the "text", "data", and "bss" 4684 sections, but you use `SEGMENT_START' with any segment name. 4685 4686 `SIZEOF(SECTION)' 4687 Return the size in bytes of the named SECTION, if that section has 4688 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is 4689 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following 4690 example, `symbol_1' and `symbol_2' are assigned identical values: 4691 SECTIONS{ ... 4692 .output { 4693 .start = . ; 4694 ... 4695 .end = . ; 4696 } 4697 symbol_1 = .end - .start ; 4698 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output); 4699 ... } 4700 4701 `SIZEOF_HEADERS' 4702 `sizeof_headers' 4703 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is 4704 information which appears at the start of the output file. You 4705 can use this number when setting the start address of the first 4706 section, if you choose, to facilitate paging. 4707 4708 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the 4709 `SIZEOF_HEADERS' builtin function, the linker must compute the 4710 number of program headers before it has determined all the section 4711 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs 4712 additional program headers, it will report an error `not enough 4713 room for program headers'. To avoid this error, you must avoid 4714 using the `SIZEOF_HEADERS' function, or you must rework your linker 4715 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program 4716 headers, or you must define the program headers yourself using the 4717 `PHDRS' command (*note PHDRS::). 4718 4719 4720 File: ld.info, Node: Implicit Linker Scripts, Prev: Expressions, Up: Scripts 4721 4722 3.11 Implicit Linker Scripts 4723 ============================ 4724 4725 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as 4726 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a 4727 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the 4728 linker will report an error. 4729 4730 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script. 4731 4732 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol 4733 assignments, or the `INPUT', `GROUP', or `VERSION' commands. 4734 4735 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be 4736 read at the position in the command line where the implicit linker 4737 script was read. This can affect archive searching. 4738 4739 4740 File: ld.info, Node: Machine Dependent, Next: BFD, Prev: Scripts, Up: Top 4741 4742 4 Machine Dependent Features 4743 **************************** 4744 4745 `ld' has additional features on some platforms; the following sections 4746 describe them. Machines where `ld' has no additional functionality are 4747 not listed. 4748 4749 * Menu: 4750 4751 4752 * H8/300:: `ld' and the H8/300 4753 4754 * i960:: `ld' and the Intel 960 family 4755 4756 * ARM:: `ld' and the ARM family 4757 4758 * HPPA ELF32:: `ld' and HPPA 32-bit ELF 4759 4760 * M68K:: `ld' and the Motorola 68K family 4761 4762 * MMIX:: `ld' and MMIX 4763 4764 * MSP430:: `ld' and MSP430 4765 4766 * M68HC11/68HC12:: `ld' and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families 4767 4768 * PowerPC ELF32:: `ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support 4769 4770 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: `ld' and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support 4771 4772 * SPU ELF:: `ld' and SPU ELF Support 4773 4774 * TI COFF:: `ld' and TI COFF 4775 4776 * WIN32:: `ld' and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw) 4777 4778 * Xtensa:: `ld' and Xtensa Processors 4779 4780 4781 File: ld.info, Node: H8/300, Next: i960, Up: Machine Dependent 4782 4783 4.1 `ld' and the H8/300 4784 ======================= 4785 4786 For the H8/300, `ld' can perform these global optimizations when you 4787 specify the `--relax' command-line option. 4788 4789 _relaxing address modes_ 4790 `ld' finds all `jsr' and `jmp' instructions whose targets are 4791 within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit program-counter 4792 relative `bsr' and `bra' instructions, respectively. 4793 4794 _synthesizing instructions_ 4795 `ld' finds all `mov.b' instructions which use the sixteen-bit 4796 absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and 4797 changes them to use the eight-bit address form. (That is: the 4798 linker turns `mov.b `@'AA:16' into `mov.b `@'AA:8' whenever the 4799 address AA is in the top page of memory). 4800 4801 _bit manipulation instructions_ 4802 `ld' finds all bit manipulation instructions like `band, bclr, 4803 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, 4804 bxor' which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer 4805 to the top page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit 4806 address form. (That is: the linker turns `bset #xx:3,`@'AA:32' 4807 into `bset #xx:3,`@'AA:8' whenever the address AA is in the top 4808 page of memory). 4809 4810 _system control instructions_ 4811 `ld' finds all `ldc.w, stc.w' instructions which use the 32 bit 4812 absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and 4813 changes them to use 16 bit address form. (That is: the linker 4814 turns `ldc.w `@'AA:32,ccr' into `ldc.w `@'AA:16,ccr' whenever the 4815 address AA is in the top page of memory). 4816 4817 4818 File: ld.info, Node: i960, Next: ARM, Prev: H8/300, Up: Machine Dependent 4819 4820 4.2 `ld' and the Intel 960 Family 4821 ================================= 4822 4823 You can use the `-AARCHITECTURE' command line option to specify one of 4824 the two-letter names identifying members of the 960 family; the option 4825 specifies the desired output target, and warns of any incompatible 4826 instructions in the input files. It also modifies the linker's search 4827 strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of libraries 4828 specific to each particular architecture, by including in the search 4829 loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture. 4830 4831 For example, if your `ld' command line included `-ACA' as well as 4832 `-ltry', the linker would look (in its built-in search paths, and in 4833 any paths you specify with `-L') for a library with the names 4834 4835 try 4836 libtry.a 4837 tryca 4838 libtryca.a 4839 4840 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last 4841 two are due to the use of `-ACA'. 4842 4843 You can meaningfully use `-A' more than once on a command line, since 4844 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; 4845 each use will add another pair of name variants to search for when `-l' 4846 specifies a library. 4847 4848 `ld' supports the `--relax' option for the i960 family. If you 4849 specify `--relax', `ld' finds all `balx' and `calx' instructions whose 4850 targets are within 24 bits, and turns them into 24-bit program-counter 4851 relative `bal' and `cal' instructions, respectively. `ld' also turns 4852 `cal' instructions into `bal' instructions when it determines that the 4853 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does 4854 not itself call any subroutines). 4855 4856 The `--fix-cortex-a8' switch enables a link-time workaround for an 4857 erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by 4858 default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can 4859 be enabled otherwise by specifying `--fix-cortex-a8', or disabled 4860 unconditionally by specifying `--no-fix-cortex-a8'. 4861 4862 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for 4863 further details. 4864 4865 4866 File: ld.info, Node: M68HC11/68HC12, Next: PowerPC ELF32, Prev: MSP430, Up: Machine Dependent 4867 4868 4.3 `ld' and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families 4869 ==================================================== 4870 4871 4.3.1 Linker Relaxation 4872 ----------------------- 4873 4874 For the Motorola 68HC11, `ld' can perform these global optimizations 4875 when you specify the `--relax' command-line option. 4876 4877 _relaxing address modes_ 4878 `ld' finds all `jsr' and `jmp' instructions whose targets are 4879 within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit program-counter 4880 relative `bsr' and `bra' instructions, respectively. 4881 4882 `ld' also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and 4883 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in 4884 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff). 4885 4886 _relaxing gcc instruction group_ 4887 When `gcc' is called with `-mrelax', it can emit group of 4888 instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct 4889 addressing mode. These instructions consists of `bclr' or `bset' 4890 instructions. 4891 4892 4893 4.3.2 Trampoline Generation 4894 --------------------------- 4895 4896 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, `ld' can generate trampoline code to call a far 4897 function using a normal `jsr' instruction. The linker will also change 4898 the relocation to some far function to use the trampoline address 4899 instead of the function address. This is typically the case when a 4900 pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact point to the 4901 function trampoline. 4902 4903 4904 File: ld.info, Node: ARM, Next: HPPA ELF32, Prev: i960, Up: Machine Dependent 4905 4906 4.4 `ld' and the ARM family 4907 =========================== 4908 4909 For the ARM, `ld' will generate code stubs to allow functions calls 4910 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has 4911 been compiled and assembled with the `-mthumb-interwork' command line 4912 option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or 4913 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork 4914 option then the `--support-old-code' command line switch should be 4915 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions 4916 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however, 4917 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to 4918 non-interworking aware Thumb code. 4919 4920 The `--thumb-entry' switch is a duplicate of the generic `--entry' 4921 switch, in that it sets the program's starting address. But it also 4922 sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be branched to using 4923 a BX instruction, and the program will start executing in Thumb mode 4924 straight away. 4925 4926 The `--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables' switch is specifying, that 4927 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero 4928 elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate 4929 import tables. By default this option is turned off. 4930 4931 The `--be8' switch instructs `ld' to generate BE8 format 4932 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects. 4933 The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code. 4934 4935 The `R_ARM_TARGET1' relocation is typically used for entries in the 4936 `.init_array' section. It is interpreted as either `R_ARM_REL32' or 4937 `R_ARM_ABS32', depending on the target. The `--target1-rel' and 4938 `--target1-abs' switches override the default. 4939 4940 The `--target2=type' switch overrides the default definition of the 4941 `R_ARM_TARGET2' relocation. Valid values for `type', their meanings, 4942 and target defaults are as follows: 4943 `rel' 4944 `R_ARM_REL32' (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi) 4945 4946 `abs' 4947 `R_ARM_ABS32' (arm*-*-symbianelf) 4948 4949 `got-rel' 4950 `R_ARM_GOT_PREL' (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd) 4951 4952 The `R_ARM_V4BX' relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF specification) 4953 enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be 4954 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, 4955 but also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 4956 objects. 4957 4958 In the latter case, the switch `--fix-v4bx' must be passed to the 4959 linker, which causes v4t `BX rM' instructions to be rewritten as `MOV 4960 PC,rM', since v4 processors do not have a `BX' instruction. 4961 4962 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and `R_ARM_V4BX' 4963 relocations are ignored. 4964 4965 Replace `BX rM' instructions identified by `R_ARM_V4BX' relocations 4966 with a branch to the following veneer: 4967 4968 TST rM, #1 4969 MOVEQ PC, rM 4970 BX Rn 4971 4972 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 4973 cores and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer 4974 clobbers the condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in 4975 rare cases. 4976 4977 The `--use-blx' switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb BLX 4978 instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various situations. 4979 Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb code using 4980 BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before each PLT 4981 entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster. 4982 4983 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need 4984 to specify it if you are using that target. 4985 4986 The `--vfp11-denorm-fix' switch enables a link-time workaround for a 4987 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows 4988 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support 4989 code) to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions 4990 before the support code can read the intended values. 4991 4992 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one 4993 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a 4994 register and another instruction which writes to the same register, or 4995 at least two intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug 4996 only affects full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this 4997 workaround if you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for 4998 further details. 4999 5000 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can enable this 5001 workaround by specifying the linker option `--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar' if 5002 you are using the VFP11 scalar mode only, or `--vfp-denorm-fix=vector' 5003 if you are using vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). 5004 The default is `--vfp-denorm-fix=none'. 5005 5006 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for 5007 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each 5008 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the 5009 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent 5010 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to 5011 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer 5012 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases. 5013 5014 The `--no-enum-size-warning' switch prevents the linker from warning 5015 when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI enumeration 5016 size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled, linking of an 5017 object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another using 5018 enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will not be 5019 diagnosed. 5020 5021 The `--no-wchar-size-warning' switch prevents the linker from 5022 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI 5023 `wchar_t' size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled, 5024 linking of an object file using 32-bit `wchar_t' values with another 5025 using 16-bit `wchar_t' values will not be diagnosed. 5026 5027 The `--pic-veneer' switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for 5028 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary is not 5029 PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where `--emit-relocs' is 5030 used to generate relocatable binaries. 5031 5032 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of 5033 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to 5034 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The 5035 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is 5036 controlled by the command line option `--stub-group-size=N'. The 5037 placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for 5038 duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to 5039 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of 5040 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and 5041 where they should be placed. 5042 5043 The value of `N', the parameter to the `--stub-group-size=' option 5044 controls where the stub groups are placed. If it is negative then all 5045 stubs are placed after the first branch that needs them. If it is 5046 positive then the stubs can be placed either before or after the 5047 branches that need them. If the value of `N' is 1 (either +1 or -1) 5048 then the linker will choose exactly where to place groups of stubs, 5049 using its built in heuristics. A value of `N' greater than 1 (or 5050 smaller than -1) tells the linker that a single group of stubs can 5051 service at most `N' bytes from the input sections. 5052 5053 The default, if `--stub-group-size=' is not specified, is `N = +1'. 5054 5055 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target 5056 only, because it relies on object files properties not present 5057 otherwise. 5058 5059 5060 File: ld.info, Node: HPPA ELF32, Next: M68K, Prev: ARM, Up: Machine Dependent 5061 5062 4.5 `ld' and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support 5063 ==================================== 5064 5065 When generating a shared library, `ld' will by default generate import 5066 stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application. The 5067 `--multi-subspace' switch causes `ld' to generate export stubs, and 5068 different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with multiple 5069 sub-spaces. 5070 5071 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by `ld' in stub 5072 sections located between groups of input sections. `--stub-group-size' 5073 specifies the maximum size of a group of input sections handled by one 5074 stub section. Since branch offsets are signed, a stub section may 5075 serve two groups of input sections, one group before the stub section, 5076 and one group after it. However, when using conditional branches that 5077 require stubs, it may be better (for branch prediction) that stub 5078 sections only serve one group of input sections. A negative value for 5079 `N' chooses this scheme, ensuring that branches to stubs always use a 5080 negative offset. Two special values of `N' are recognized, `1' and 5081 `-1'. These both instruct `ld' to automatically size input section 5082 groups for the branch types detected, with the same behaviour regarding 5083 stub placement as other positive or negative values of `N' respectively. 5084 5085 Note that `--stub-group-size' does not split input sections. A 5086 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course 5087 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too 5088 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub. 5089 5090 5091 File: ld.info, Node: M68K, Next: MMIX, Prev: HPPA ELF32, Up: Machine Dependent 5092 5093 4.6 `ld' and the Motorola 68K family 5094 ==================================== 5095 5096 The `--got=TYPE' option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme. The 5097 choices are `single', `negative', `multigot' and `target'. When 5098 `target' is selected the linker chooses the default GOT generation 5099 scheme for the current target. `single' tells the linker to generate a 5100 single GOT with entries only at non-negative offsets. `negative' 5101 instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with entries at both 5102 negative and positive offsets. Not all environments support such GOTs. 5103 `multigot' allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the output 5104 file. All GOT references from a single input object file access the 5105 same GOT, but references from different input object files might access 5106 different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs. 5107 5108 5109 File: ld.info, Node: MMIX, Next: MSP430, Prev: M68K, Up: Machine Dependent 5110 5111 4.7 `ld' and MMIX 5112 ================= 5113 5114 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating `ELF' object files or `mmo' 5115 object files when linking. The simulator `mmix' understands the `mmo' 5116 format. The binutils `objcopy' utility can translate between the two 5117 formats. 5118 5119 There is one special section, the `.MMIX.reg_contents' section. 5120 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global 5121 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special 5122 symbols, equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the 5123 `.MMIX.reg_contents' section corresponds to the first allocated global 5124 register multiplied by 8. Register `$255' is not included in this 5125 section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the symbol 5126 `Main' for `mmo' files. 5127 5128 Global symbols with the prefix `__.MMIX.start.', for example 5129 `__.MMIX.start..text' and `__.MMIX.start..data' are special. The 5130 default linker script uses these to set the default start address of a 5131 section. 5132 5133 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a 5134 section, are left out from an mmo file. 5135 5136 5137 File: ld.info, Node: MSP430, Next: M68HC11/68HC12, Prev: MMIX, Up: Machine Dependent 5138 5139 4.8 `ld' and MSP430 5140 =================== 5141 5142 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag 5143 `-m [mpu type]' will select an appropriate linker script for selected 5144 MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs just pass `-m help' option to 5145 the linker). 5146 5147 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 5148 specific: 5149 5150 ``.vectors'' 5151 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located. 5152 5153 ``.bootloader'' 5154 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any 5155 code in this section will be uploaded to the MPU. 5156 5157 ``.infomem'' 5158 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in 5159 this section will be uploaded to the MPU. 5160 5161 ``.infomemnobits'' 5162 This is the same as the `.infomem' section except that any code in 5163 this section will not be uploaded to the MPU. 5164 5165 ``.noinit'' 5166 Denotes a portion of RAM located above `.bss' section. 5167 5168 The last two sections are used by gcc. 5169 5170 5171 File: ld.info, Node: PowerPC ELF32, Next: PowerPC64 ELF64, Prev: M68HC11/68HC12, Up: Machine Dependent 5172 5173 4.9 `ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support 5174 ======================================= 5175 5176 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit 5177 displacement, which may result in `ld' giving `relocation truncated to 5178 fit' errors with very large programs. `--relax' enables the generation 5179 of trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space. These 5180 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves 5181 be reachable if an input section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine 5182 `-r' and `--relax' to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case 5183 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also 5184 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted. 5185 5186 `--bss-plt' 5187 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a `-msecure-plt' option that generates 5188 code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has the 5189 security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be 5190 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC 5191 `ld' will generate this layout, including stubs to access the PLT, 5192 if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were 5193 compiled with `-msecure-plt'. `--bss-plt' forces the old BSS PLT 5194 (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance. 5195 5196 `--secure-plt' 5197 `ld' will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new 5198 `-fpic' or `-fPIC' code, but does not do so automatically when 5199 linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT 5200 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the 5201 old style BSS PLT. 5202 5203 `--sdata-got' 5204 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other 5205 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The 5206 location of `.plt' must change because the new secure PLT is an 5207 initialized section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The 5208 reason for the `.got' change is more subtle: The new placement 5209 allows `.got' to be read-only in applications linked with `-z 5210 relro -z now'. However, this placement means that `.sdata' cannot 5211 always be used in shared libraries, because the PowerPC ABI 5212 accesses `.sdata' in shared libraries from the GOT pointer. 5213 `--sdata-got' forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC GCC doesn't 5214 use `.sdata' in shared libraries, so this option is really only 5215 useful for other compilers that may do so. 5216 5217 `--emit-stub-syms' 5218 This option causes `ld' to label linker stubs with a local symbol 5219 that encodes the stub type and destination. 5220 5221 `--no-tls-optimize' 5222 PowerPC `ld' normally performs some optimization of code sequences 5223 used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to disable 5224 the optimization. 5225 5226 5227 File: ld.info, Node: PowerPC64 ELF64, Next: SPU ELF, Prev: PowerPC ELF32, Up: Machine Dependent 5228 5229 4.10 `ld' and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support 5230 ========================================== 5231 5232 `--stub-group-size' 5233 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are 5234 placed by `ld' in stub sections located between groups of input 5235 sections. `--stub-group-size' specifies the maximum size of a 5236 group of input sections handled by one stub section. Since branch 5237 offsets are signed, a stub section may serve two groups of input 5238 sections, one group before the stub section, and one group after 5239 it. However, when using conditional branches that require stubs, 5240 it may be better (for branch prediction) that stub sections only 5241 serve one group of input sections. A negative value for `N' 5242 chooses this scheme, ensuring that branches to stubs always use a 5243 negative offset. Two special values of `N' are recognized, `1' 5244 and `-1'. These both instruct `ld' to automatically size input 5245 section groups for the branch types detected, with the same 5246 behaviour regarding stub placement as other positive or negative 5247 values of `N' respectively. 5248 5249 Note that `--stub-group-size' does not split input sections. A 5250 single input section larger than the group size specified will of 5251 course create a larger group (of one section). If input sections 5252 are too large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its 5253 stub. 5254 5255 `--emit-stub-syms' 5256 This option causes `ld' to label linker stubs with a local symbol 5257 that encodes the stub type and destination. 5258 5259 `--dotsyms, --no-dotsyms' 5260 These two options control how `ld' interprets version patterns in 5261 a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a 5262 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and 5263 a code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (`.'). To 5264 properly version a function `foo', the version script thus needs 5265 to control both `foo' and `.foo'. The option `--dotsyms', on by 5266 default, automatically adds the required dot-prefixed patterns. 5267 Use `--no-dotsyms' to disable this feature. 5268 5269 `--no-tls-optimize' 5270 PowerPC64 `ld' normally performs some optimization of code 5271 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to 5272 disable the optimization. 5273 5274 `--no-opd-optimize' 5275 PowerPC64 `ld' normally removes `.opd' section entries 5276 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed 5277 by the action of `--gc-sections' or linker script `/DISCARD/'. 5278 Use this option to disable `.opd' optimization. 5279 5280 `--non-overlapping-opd' 5281 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed 5282 `.opd' entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word, 5283 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the 5284 next entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes. 5285 5286 `--no-toc-optimize' 5287 PowerPC64 `ld' normally removes unused `.toc' section entries. 5288 Such entries are detected by examining relocations that reference 5289 the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section marks 5290 a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section marks 5291 a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC 5292 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and 5293 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing 5294 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or 5295 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works 5296 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if 5297 assembly code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to 5298 disable the optimization. 5299 5300 `--no-multi-toc' 5301 By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC 5302 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the 5303 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 `ld' extends this limit by 5304 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for 5305 its TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between 5306 inter-group calls. `ld' does not split apart input sections, so 5307 cannot help if a single input file has a `.toc' section that 5308 exceeds 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with `ld -r'. 5309 Use this option to turn off this feature. 5310 5311 5312 File: ld.info, Node: SPU ELF, Next: TI COFF, Prev: PowerPC64 ELF64, Up: Machine Dependent 5313 5314 4.11 `ld' and SPU ELF Support 5315 ============================= 5316 5317 `--plugin' 5318 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module. 5319 5320 `--no-overlays' 5321 Normally, `ld' recognizes calls to functions within overlay 5322 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub. 5323 `ld' also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option turns 5324 off all this special overlay handling. 5325 5326 `--emit-stub-syms' 5327 This option causes `ld' to label overlay stubs with a local symbol 5328 that encodes the stub type and destination. 5329 5330 `--extra-overlay-stubs' 5331 This option causes `ld' to add overlay call stubs on all function 5332 calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added on 5333 calls to non-overlay regions. 5334 5335 `--local-store=lo:hi' 5336 `ld' usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in the 5337 address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the 5338 range. Disable the check entirely with `--local-store=0:0'. 5339 5340 `--stack-analysis' 5341 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space 5342 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while 5343 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this 5344 option, `ld' will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage. 5345 `ld' does this by examining symbols in code sections to determine 5346 the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues for 5347 stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking 5348 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched 5349 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not 5350 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle 5351 recursion and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be 5352 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage 5353 for dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a 5354 link map is requested, detailed information about each function's 5355 stack usage and calls will be given. 5356 5357 `--emit-stack-syms' 5358 This option, if given along with `--stack-analysis' will result in 5359 `ld' emitting stack sizing symbols for each function. These take 5360 the form `__stack_<function_name>' for global functions, and 5361 `__stack_<number>_<function_name>' for static functions. 5362 `<number>' is the section id in hex. The value of such symbols is 5363 the stack requirement for the corresponding function. The symbol 5364 size will be zero, type `STT_NOTYPE', binding `STB_LOCAL', and 5365 section `SHN_ABS'. 5366 5367 5368 File: ld.info, Node: TI COFF, Next: WIN32, Prev: SPU ELF, Up: Machine Dependent 5369 5370 4.12 `ld''s Support for Various TI COFF Versions 5371 ================================================ 5372 5373 The `--format' switch allows selection of one of the various TI COFF 5374 versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are also 5375 supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order format; 5376 `ld' will read any version or byte order, but the output header format 5377 depends on the default specified by the specific target. 5378 5379 5380 File: ld.info, Node: WIN32, Next: Xtensa, Prev: TI COFF, Up: Machine Dependent 5381 5382 4.13 `ld' and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw) 5383 ================================== 5384 5385 This section describes some of the win32 specific `ld' issues. See 5386 *Note Command Line Options: Options. for detailed description of the 5387 command line options mentioned here. 5388 5389 _import libraries_ 5390 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import 5391 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They 5392 are regular static archives and are handled as any other static 5393 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of `ld' have specific support 5394 for creating such libraries provided with the `--out-implib' 5395 command line option. 5396 5397 _exporting DLL symbols_ 5398 The cygwin/mingw `ld' has several ways to export symbols for dll's. 5399 5400 _using auto-export functionality_ 5401 By default `ld' exports symbols with the auto-export 5402 functionality, which is controlled by the following command 5403 line options: 5404 5405 * -export-all-symbols [This is the default] 5406 5407 * -exclude-symbols 5408 5409 * -exclude-libs 5410 5411 * -exclude-modules-for-implib 5412 5413 * -version-script 5414 5415 When auto-export is in operation, `ld' will export all the 5416 non-local (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with 5417 the exception of a few symbols known to belong to the 5418 system's runtime and libraries. As it will often not be 5419 desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include 5420 private functions that are not part of any public interface, 5421 the command-line options listed above may be used to filter 5422 symbols out from the list for exporting. The `--output-def' 5423 option can be used in order to see the final list of exported 5424 symbols with all exclusions taken into effect. 5425 5426 If `--export-all-symbols' is not given explicitly on the 5427 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be 5428 _disabled_ if either of the following are true: 5429 5430 * A DEF file is used. 5431 5432 * Any symbol in any object file was marked with the 5433 __declspec(dllexport) attribute. 5434 5435 _using a DEF file_ 5436 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF 5437 file is an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which 5438 should be exported when a dll is created. Usually it is 5439 named `<dll name>.def' and is added as any other object file 5440 to the linker's command line. The file's name must end in 5441 `.def' or `.DEF'. 5442 5443 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def 5444 5445 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, 5446 unless the `--export-all-symbols' option is also used. 5447 5448 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called 5449 `xyz.dll': 5450 5451 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000 5452 5453 EXPORTS 5454 foo 5455 bar 5456 _bar = bar 5457 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo 5458 var1 DATA 5459 5460 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address 5461 and five symbols in the export table. The third exported 5462 symbol `_bar' is an alias for the second. The fourth symbol, 5463 `another_foo' is resolved by "forwarding" to another module 5464 and treating it as an alias for `afoo' exported from the DLL 5465 `abc.dll'. The final symbol `var1' is declared to be a data 5466 object. 5467 5468 The optional `LIBRARY <name>' command indicates the _internal_ 5469 name of the output DLL. If `<name>' does not include a suffix, 5470 the default library suffix, `.DLL' is appended. 5471 5472 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather 5473 than a library, the `NAME <name>' command should be used 5474 instead of `LIBRARY'. If `<name>' does not include a suffix, 5475 the default executable suffix, `.EXE' is appended. 5476 5477 With either `LIBRARY <name>' or `NAME <name>' the optional 5478 specification `BASE = <number>' may be used to specify a 5479 non-default base address for the image. 5480 5481 If neither `LIBRARY <name>' nor `NAME <name>' is specified, 5482 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the 5483 same as the filename specified on the command line. 5484 5485 The complete specification of an export symbol is: 5486 5487 EXPORTS 5488 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] ) 5489 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>)) 5490 [ @ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] ) * 5491 5492 Declares `<name1>' as an exported symbol from the DLL, or 5493 declares `<name1>' as an exported alias for `<name2>'; or 5494 declares `<name1>' as a "forward" alias for the symbol 5495 `<external-name>' in the DLL `<module-name>'. Optionally, 5496 the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal 5497 `<integer>' alias. 5498 5499 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate: 5500 5501 `NONAME': Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export 5502 table. It will still be exported by its ordinal alias 5503 (either the value specified by the .def specification or, 5504 otherwise, the value assigned by the linker). The symbol 5505 name, however, does remain visible in the import library (if 5506 any), unless `PRIVATE' is also specified. 5507 5508 `DATA': The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a 5509 function. The import lib will export only an indirect 5510 reference to `foo' as the symbol `_imp__foo' (ie, `foo' must 5511 be resolved as `*_imp__foo'). 5512 5513 `CONSTANT': Like `DATA', but put the undecorated `foo' as 5514 well as `_imp__foo' into the import library. Both refer to the 5515 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not 5516 to the variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user 5517 code fails to add the `dllimport' attribute and also fails to 5518 explicitly add the extra indirection that the use of the 5519 attribute enforces, the application will behave unexpectedly. 5520 5521 `PRIVATE': Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do 5522 not put it into the static import library used to resolve 5523 imports at link time. The symbol can still be imported using 5524 the `LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress' API at runtime or by by 5525 using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to the DLL 5526 without an import library. 5527 5528 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full 5529 specification of other DEF file statements 5530 5531 While linking a shared dll, `ld' is able to create a DEF file 5532 with the `--output-def <file>' command line option. 5533 5534 _Using decorations_ 5535 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the 5536 source code itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol 5537 to be exported is declared as: 5538 5539 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable 5540 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args) 5541 5542 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however, 5543 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated 5544 in this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is 5545 disabled, unless the `--export-all-symbols' option is also 5546 used. 5547 5548 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must 5549 _not_ decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use 5550 dllimport, instead: 5551 5552 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable 5553 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args) 5554 5555 This complicates the structure of library header files, 5556 because when included by the library itself the header must 5557 declare the variables and functions as dllexport, but when 5558 included by client code the header must declare them as 5559 dllimport. There are a number of idioms that are typically 5560 used to do this; often client code can omit the __declspec() 5561 declaration completely. See `--enable-auto-import' and 5562 `automatic data imports' for more information. 5563 5564 _automatic data imports_ 5565 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls 5566 only by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which 5567 let the compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal 5568 with this issue. This increases the effort necessary to port 5569 existing Un*x code to these platforms, especially for large c++ 5570 libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was 5571 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the 5572 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on 5573 POSIX/Un*x platforms. This feature is enabled with the 5574 `--enable-auto-import' command-line option, although it is enabled 5575 by default on cygwin/mingw. The `--enable-auto-import' option 5576 itself now serves mainly to suppress any warnings that are 5577 ordinarily emitted when linked objects trigger the feature's use. 5578 5579 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without 5580 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message 5581 5582 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the 5583 documentation for ld's `--enable-auto-import' for details." 5584 5585 The `--enable-auto-import' documentation explains why this error 5586 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this 5587 difficulty. One of these methods is the _runtime pseudo-relocs_ 5588 feature, described below. 5589 5590 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or 5591 classes), object files typically contain a base address for the 5592 variable and an offset (_addend_) within the variable-to specify a 5593 particular field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, 5594 the runtime loader used in win32 environments is incapable of 5595 fixing these references at runtime without the additional 5596 information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations. The 5597 standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve 5598 these references. 5599 5600 The `--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' switch allows these 5601 references to be resolved without error, while leaving the task of 5602 adjusting the references themselves (with their non-zero addends) 5603 to specialized code provided by the runtime environment. Recent 5604 versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and compilers 5605 provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the 5606 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the 5607 compiled result will run without error on an older system. 5608 5609 `--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' is not the default; it must be 5610 explicitly enabled as needed. 5611 5612 _direct linking to a dll_ 5613 The cygwin/mingw ports of `ld' support the direct linking, 5614 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import 5615 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than 5616 does the traditional import library method, especially when 5617 linking large libraries or applications. When `ld' creates an 5618 import lib, each function or variable exported from the dll is 5619 stored in its own bfd, even though a single bfd could contain many 5620 exports. The overhead involved in storing, loading, and 5621 processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the 5622 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against 5623 particularly large or complex libraries when using import libs. 5624 5625 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches 5626 other than `-L' and `-l', because `ld' already searches for a 5627 number of names to match each library. All that is needed from 5628 the developer's perspective is an understanding of this search, in 5629 order to force ld to select the dll instead of an import library. 5630 5631 For instance, when ld is called with the argument `-lxxx' it will 5632 attempt to find, in the first directory of its search path, 5633 5634 libxxx.dll.a 5635 xxx.dll.a 5636 libxxx.a 5637 xxx.lib 5638 cygxxx.dll (*) 5639 libxxx.dll 5640 xxx.dll 5641 5642 before moving on to the next directory in the search path. 5643 5644 (*) Actually, this is not `cygxxx.dll' but in fact is 5645 `<prefix>xxx.dll', where `<prefix>' is set by the `ld' option 5646 `--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>'. In the case of cygwin, the 5647 standard gcc spec file includes `--dll-search-prefix=cyg', so in 5648 effect we actually search for `cygxxx.dll'. 5649 5650 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may 5651 use other `<prefix>'es, although at present only cygwin makes use 5652 of this feature. It was originally intended to help avoid name 5653 conflicts among dll's built for the various win32/un*x 5654 environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll 5655 could coexist on the same machine. 5656 5657 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a `bin' directory for 5658 applications and dll's and a `lib' directory for the import 5659 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature): 5660 5661 bin/ 5662 cygxxx.dll 5663 lib/ 5664 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's) 5665 libxxx.a (in case of static archive) 5666 5667 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be 5668 done two ways: 5669 5670 1. Use the dll directly by adding the `bin' path to the link line 5671 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx 5672 5673 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their 5674 names (`cygncurses-5.dll') this will often fail, unless one 5675 specifies `-L../bin -lncurses-5' to include the version. Import 5676 libs are generally not versioned, and do not have this difficulty. 5677 5678 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the `lib' 5679 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This 5680 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for 5681 making the app/dll. 5682 5683 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a] 5684 5685 Then you can link without any make environment changes. 5686 5687 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx 5688 5689 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because 5690 the following is perfectly legal 5691 5692 bin/ 5693 cygxxx-5.dll 5694 lib/ 5695 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll 5696 5697 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work 5698 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when 5699 `--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' is used. 5700 5701 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might 5702 justifiably wonder why import libraries are used at all. There 5703 are three reasons: 5704 5705 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did _not_ 5706 work with auto-imported data. 5707 5708 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within 5709 the import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for 5710 indirection symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, 5711 the import lib for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, 5712 and it is not possible to do this without an import lib. 5713 5714 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This 5715 is critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 5716 API) in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases 5717 of their stdcall-decorated assembly names. 5718 5719 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace 5720 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of) a 5721 dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools 5722 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the 5723 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage 5724 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers 5725 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible. 5726 5727 _symbol aliasing_ 5728 5729 _adding additional names_ 5730 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional 5731 names. A symbol `foo' will be exported as `foo', but it can 5732 also be exported as `_foo' by using special directives in the 5733 DEF file when creating the dll. This will affect also the 5734 optional created import library. Consider the following DEF 5735 file: 5736 5737 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000 5738 5739 EXPORTS 5740 foo 5741 _foo = foo 5742 5743 The line `_foo = foo' maps the symbol `foo' to `_foo'. 5744 5745 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in 5746 the source code using the "weak" attribute: 5747 5748 void foo () { /* Do something. */; } 5749 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo"))); 5750 5751 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and 5752 weak symbols. 5753 5754 _renaming symbols_ 5755 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the 5756 cygwin kernel does this regularly. A symbol `_foo' can be 5757 exported as `foo' but not as `_foo' by using special 5758 directives in the DEF file. (This will also affect the import 5759 library, if it is created). In the following example: 5760 5761 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000 5762 5763 EXPORTS 5764 _foo = foo 5765 5766 The line `_foo = foo' maps the exported symbol `foo' to 5767 `_foo'. 5768 5769 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior, 5770 unless the `--export-all-symbols' command line option is used. 5771 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list 5772 _all_ desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols that 5773 are not being renamed, and do _not_ use the `--export-all-symbols' 5774 option. If you list only the renamed symbols in the DEF file, and 5775 use `--export-all-symbols' to handle the other symbols, then the 5776 both the new names _and_ the original names for the renamed 5777 symbols will be exported. In effect, you'd be aliasing those 5778 symbols, not renaming them, which is probably not what you wanted. 5779 5780 _weak externals_ 5781 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols 5782 called weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the 5783 symbol is not defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some 5784 other symbol. There are three variants of weak externals: 5785 * Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, 5786 historically called lazy externals. 5787 5788 * Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in 5789 libraries. This form is not presently implemented. 5790 5791 * No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently 5792 implemented. 5793 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate 5794 symbol are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, 5795 the symbol uses a default value. 5796 5797 _aligned common symbols_ 5798 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to 5799 specify the desired alignment for a common symbol. This 5800 information is conveyed from the assembler or compiler to the 5801 linker by means of GNU-specific commands carried in the object 5802 file's `.drectve' section, which are recognized by `ld' and 5803 respected when laying out the common symbols. Native tools will 5804 be able to process object files employing this GNU extension, but 5805 will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue 5806 noisy warnings about unknown linker directives. 5807 5808 5809 File: ld.info, Node: Xtensa, Prev: WIN32, Up: Machine Dependent 5810 5811 4.14 `ld' and Xtensa Processors 5812 =============================== 5813 5814 The default `ld' behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret 5815 `SECTIONS' commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a 5816 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to 5817 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For 5818 example, with the command: 5819 5820 SECTIONS 5821 { 5822 .text : { 5823 *(.literal .text) 5824 } 5825 } 5826 5827 `ld' may interleave some of the `.literal' and `.text' sections from 5828 different object files to ensure that the literal pools are within the 5829 range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid interleaving might place 5830 the `.literal' sections from an initial group of files followed by the 5831 `.text' sections of that group of files. Then, the `.literal' sections 5832 from the rest of the files and the `.text' sections from the rest of 5833 the files would follow. 5834 5835 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of `ld' and 5836 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization 5837 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant 5838 literal will be removed and all the `L32R' instructions that use it 5839 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the 5840 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all 5841 the `L32R' instructions. The second optimization is to remove 5842 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated "longcall" sequences of 5843 `L32R'/`CALLXN' when the target functions are within range of direct 5844 `CALLN' instructions. 5845 5846 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be 5847 optimized to a direct call, the linker will change the `CALLXN' 5848 instruction to a `CALLN' instruction, remove the `L32R' instruction, 5849 and remove the literal referenced by the `L32R' instruction if it is 5850 not used for anything else. Removing the `L32R' instruction always 5851 reduces code size but can potentially hurt performance by changing the 5852 alignment of subsequent branch targets. By default, the linker will 5853 always preserve alignments, either by switching some instructions 5854 between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent density instructions or by 5855 inserting a no-op in place of the `L32R' instruction that was removed. 5856 If code size is more important than performance, the `--size-opt' 5857 option can be used to prevent the linker from widening density 5858 instructions or inserting no-ops, except in a few cases where no-ops 5859 are required for correctness. 5860 5861 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to 5862 control the linker: 5863 5864 `--no-relax' 5865 Since the Xtensa version of `ld' enables the `--relax' option by 5866 default, the `--no-relax' option is provided to disable relaxation. 5867 5868 `--size-opt' 5869 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code 5870 size more than performance. With this option, the linker will not 5871 insert no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch 5872 target alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are 5873 required to preserve the correctness of the code. 5874 5875 5876 File: ld.info, Node: BFD, Next: Reporting Bugs, Prev: Machine Dependent, Up: Top 5877 5878 5 BFD 5879 ***** 5880 5881 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries. 5882 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on 5883 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file 5884 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding 5885 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and 5886 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the 5887 object file formats available. You can use `objdump -i' (*note 5888 objdump: (binutils.info)objdump.) to list all the formats available for 5889 your configuration. 5890 5891 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between several 5892 conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing BFD design was 5893 efficiency: any time used converting between formats is time which 5894 would not have been spent had BFD not been involved. This is partly 5895 offset by abstraction payback; since BFD simplifies applications and 5896 back ends, more time and care may be spent optimizing algorithms for a 5897 greater speed. 5898 5899 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in mind 5900 is the potential for information loss. There are two places where 5901 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during 5902 conversion and during output. *Note BFD information loss::. 5903 5904 * Menu: 5905 5906 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD 5907 5908 5909 File: ld.info, Node: BFD outline, Up: BFD 5910 5911 5.1 How It Works: An Outline of BFD 5912 =================================== 5913 5914 When an object file is opened, BFD subroutines automatically determine 5915 the format of the input object file. They then build a descriptor in 5916 memory with pointers to routines that will be used to access elements of 5917 the object file's data structures. 5918 5919 As different information from the object files is required, BFD 5920 reads from different sections of the file and processes them. For 5921 example, a very common operation for the linker is processing symbol 5922 tables. Each BFD back end provides a routine for converting between 5923 the object file's representation of symbols and an internal canonical 5924 format. When the linker asks for the symbol table of an object file, it 5925 calls through a memory pointer to the routine from the relevant BFD 5926 back end which reads and converts the table into a canonical form. The 5927 linker then operates upon the canonical form. When the link is finished 5928 and the linker writes the output file's symbol table, another BFD back 5929 end routine is called to take the newly created symbol table and 5930 convert it into the chosen output format. 5931 5932 * Menu: 5933 5934 * BFD information loss:: Information Loss 5935 * Canonical format:: The BFD canonical object-file format 5936 5937 5938 File: ld.info, Node: BFD information loss, Next: Canonical format, Up: BFD outline 5939 5940 5.1.1 Information Loss 5941 ---------------------- 5942 5943 _Information can be lost during output._ The output formats supported 5944 by BFD do not provide identical facilities, and information which can 5945 be described in one form has nowhere to go in another format. One 5946 example of this is alignment information in `b.out'. There is nowhere 5947 in an `a.out' format file to store alignment information on the 5948 contained data, so when a file is linked from `b.out' and an `a.out' 5949 image is produced, alignment information will not propagate to the 5950 output file. (The linker will still use the alignment information 5951 internally, so the link is performed correctly). 5952 5953 Another example is COFF section names. COFF files may contain an 5954 unlimited number of sections, each one with a textual section name. If 5955 the target of the link is a format which does not have many sections 5956 (e.g., `a.out') or has sections without names (e.g., the Oasys format), 5957 the link cannot be done simply. You can circumvent this problem by 5958 describing the desired input-to-output section mapping with the linker 5959 command language. 5960 5961 _Information can be lost during canonicalization._ The BFD internal 5962 canonical form of the external formats is not exhaustive; there are 5963 structures in input formats for which there is no direct representation 5964 internally. This means that the BFD back ends cannot maintain all 5965 possible data richness through the transformation between external to 5966 internal and back to external formats. 5967 5968 This limitation is only a problem when an application reads one 5969 format and writes another. Each BFD back end is responsible for 5970 maintaining as much data as possible, and the internal BFD canonical 5971 form has structures which are opaque to the BFD core, and exported only 5972 to the back ends. When a file is read in one format, the canonical form 5973 is generated for BFD and the application. At the same time, the back 5974 end saves away any information which may otherwise be lost. If the data 5975 is then written back in the same format, the back end routine will be 5976 able to use the canonical form provided by the BFD core as well as the 5977 information it prepared earlier. Since there is a great deal of 5978 commonality between back ends, there is no information lost when 5979 linking or copying big endian COFF to little endian COFF, or `a.out' to 5980 `b.out'. When a mixture of formats is linked, the information is only 5981 lost from the files whose format differs from the destination. 5982 5983 5984 File: ld.info, Node: Canonical format, Prev: BFD information loss, Up: BFD outline 5985 5986 5.1.2 The BFD canonical object-file format 5987 ------------------------------------------ 5988 5989 The greatest potential for loss of information occurs when there is the 5990 least overlap between the information provided by the source format, 5991 that stored by the canonical format, and that needed by the destination 5992 format. A brief description of the canonical form may help you 5993 understand which kinds of data you can count on preserving across 5994 conversions. 5995 5996 _files_ 5997 Information stored on a per-file basis includes target machine 5998 architecture, particular implementation format type, a demand 5999 pageable bit, and a write protected bit. Information like Unix 6000 magic numbers is not stored here--only the magic numbers' meaning, 6001 so a `ZMAGIC' file would have both the demand pageable bit and the 6002 write protected text bit set. The byte order of the target is 6003 stored on a per-file basis, so that big- and little-endian object 6004 files may be used with one another. 6005 6006 _sections_ 6007 Each section in the input file contains the name of the section, 6008 the section's original address in the object file, size and 6009 alignment information, various flags, and pointers into other BFD 6010 data structures. 6011 6012 _symbols_ 6013 Each symbol contains a pointer to the information for the object 6014 file which originally defined it, its name, its value, and various 6015 flag bits. When a BFD back end reads in a symbol table, it 6016 relocates all symbols to make them relative to the base of the 6017 section where they were defined. Doing this ensures that each 6018 symbol points to its containing section. Each symbol also has a 6019 varying amount of hidden private data for the BFD back end. Since 6020 the symbol points to the original file, the private data format 6021 for that symbol is accessible. `ld' can operate on a collection 6022 of symbols of wildly different formats without problems. 6023 6024 Normal global and simple local symbols are maintained on output, 6025 so an output file (no matter its format) will retain symbols 6026 pointing to functions and to global, static, and common variables. 6027 Some symbol information is not worth retaining; in `a.out', type 6028 information is stored in the symbol table as long symbol names. 6029 This information would be useless to most COFF debuggers; the 6030 linker has command line switches to allow users to throw it away. 6031 6032 There is one word of type information within the symbol, so if the 6033 format supports symbol type information within symbols (for 6034 example, COFF, IEEE, Oasys) and the type is simple enough to fit 6035 within one word (nearly everything but aggregates), the 6036 information will be preserved. 6037 6038 _relocation level_ 6039 Each canonical BFD relocation record contains a pointer to the 6040 symbol to relocate to, the offset of the data to relocate, the 6041 section the data is in, and a pointer to a relocation type 6042 descriptor. Relocation is performed by passing messages through 6043 the relocation type descriptor and the symbol pointer. Therefore, 6044 relocations can be performed on output data using a relocation 6045 method that is only available in one of the input formats. For 6046 instance, Oasys provides a byte relocation format. A relocation 6047 record requesting this relocation type would point indirectly to a 6048 routine to perform this, so the relocation may be performed on a 6049 byte being written to a 68k COFF file, even though 68k COFF has no 6050 such relocation type. 6051 6052 _line numbers_ 6053 Object formats can contain, for debugging purposes, some form of 6054 mapping between symbols, source line numbers, and addresses in the 6055 output file. These addresses have to be relocated along with the 6056 symbol information. Each symbol with an associated list of line 6057 number records points to the first record of the list. The head 6058 of a line number list consists of a pointer to the symbol, which 6059 allows finding out the address of the function whose line number 6060 is being described. The rest of the list is made up of pairs: 6061 offsets into the section and line numbers. Any format which can 6062 simply derive this information can pass it successfully between 6063 formats (COFF, IEEE and Oasys). 6064 6065 6066 File: ld.info, Node: Reporting Bugs, Next: MRI, Prev: BFD, Up: Top 6067 6068 6 Reporting Bugs 6069 **************** 6070 6071 Your bug reports play an essential role in making `ld' reliable. 6072 6073 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, 6074 or it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report 6075 is to help the entire community by making the next version of `ld' work 6076 better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of `ld'. 6077 6078 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the 6079 information that enables us to fix the bug. 6080 6081 * Menu: 6082 6083 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug? 6084 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs 6085 6086 6087 File: ld.info, Node: Bug Criteria, Next: Bug Reporting, Up: Reporting Bugs 6088 6089 6.1 Have You Found a Bug? 6090 ========================= 6091 6092 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some 6093 guidelines: 6094 6095 * If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is 6096 a `ld' bug. Reliable linkers never crash. 6097 6098 * If `ld' produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug. 6099 6100 * If `ld' does not produce an error message for invalid input, that 6101 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that 6102 object files are correct. 6103 6104 * If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for 6105 improvement of `ld' are welcome in any case. 6106 6107 6108 File: ld.info, Node: Bug Reporting, Prev: Bug Criteria, Up: Reporting Bugs 6109 6110 6.2 How to Report Bugs 6111 ====================== 6112 6113 A number of companies and individuals offer support for GNU products. 6114 If you obtained `ld' from a support organization, we recommend you 6115 contact that organization first. 6116 6117 You can find contact information for many support companies and 6118 individuals in the file `etc/SERVICE' in the GNU Emacs distribution. 6119 6120 Otherwise, send bug reports for `ld' to 6121 `http://www.sourceware.org/bugzilla/'. 6122 6123 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this: 6124 *report all the facts*. If you are not sure whether to state a fact or 6125 leave it out, state it! 6126 6127 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the 6128 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might 6129 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. 6130 Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug 6131 is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the location 6132 where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name were 6133 different, the contents of that location would fool the linker into 6134 doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a 6135 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do, 6136 and the most helpful. 6137 6138 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix 6139 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports 6140 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously. 6141 6142 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, "Does this ring a 6143 bell?" This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We 6144 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate. You 6145 might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with. 6146 6147 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things: 6148 6149 * The version of `ld'. `ld' announces it if you start it with the 6150 `--version' argument. 6151 6152 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in 6153 looking for the bug in the current version of `ld'. 6154 6155 * Any patches you may have applied to the `ld' source, including any 6156 patches made to the `BFD' library. 6157 6158 * The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name 6159 and version number. 6160 6161 * What compiler (and its version) was used to compile `ld'--e.g. 6162 "`gcc-2.7'". 6163 6164 * The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and 6165 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something 6166 important, list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output 6167 from make) is sufficient. 6168 6169 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess 6170 wrong and then we might not encounter the bug. 6171 6172 * A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce 6173 the bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object 6174 files provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 6175 10K. For bigger files you can either make them available by FTP 6176 or HTTP or else state that you are willing to send the object 6177 file(s) to whomever requests them. (Note - your email will be 6178 going to a mailing list, so we do not want to clog it up with 6179 large attachments). But small attachments are best. 6180 6181 If the source files were assembled using `gas' or compiled using 6182 `gcc', then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the 6183 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of 6184 `gas' or `gcc' was used to produce the object files. Also say how 6185 `gas' or `gcc' were configured. 6186 6187 * A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is 6188 incorrect. For example, "It gets a fatal signal." 6189 6190 Of course, if the bug is that `ld' gets a fatal signal, then we 6191 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we 6192 might not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well 6193 not give us a chance to make a mistake. 6194 6195 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should 6196 still say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, 6197 such as, your copy of `ld' is out of sync, or you have encountered 6198 a bug in the C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your 6199 copy might crash and ours would not. If you told us to expect a 6200 crash, then when ours fails to crash, we would know that the bug 6201 was not happening for us. If you had not told us to expect a 6202 crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our 6203 observations. 6204 6205 * If you wish to suggest changes to the `ld' source, send us context 6206 diffs, as generated by `diff' with the `-u', `-c', or `-p' option. 6207 Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even 6208 discuss something in the `ld' source, refer to it by context, not 6209 by line number. 6210 6211 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those 6212 in your sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful 6213 information to us. 6214 6215 Here are some things that are not necessary: 6216 6217 * A description of the envelope of the bug. 6218 6219 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating 6220 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which 6221 changes will not affect it. 6222 6223 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way 6224 we will find the bug is by running a single example under the 6225 debugger with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of 6226 examples. We recommend that you save your time for something else. 6227 6228 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report _instead_ 6229 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the 6230 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take 6231 less time, and so on. 6232 6233 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do 6234 this, report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you 6235 used. 6236 6237 * A patch for the bug. 6238 6239 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not 6240 omit the necessary information, such as the test case, on the 6241 assumption that a patch is all we need. We might see problems 6242 with your patch and decide to fix the problem another way, or we 6243 might not understand it at all. 6244 6245 Sometimes with a program as complicated as `ld' it is very hard to 6246 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain 6247 path through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will 6248 not be able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify 6249 that the bug is fixed. 6250 6251 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why 6252 your patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A 6253 test case will help us to understand. 6254 6255 * A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on. 6256 6257 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about 6258 such things without first using the debugger to find the facts. 6259 6260 6261 File: ld.info, Node: MRI, Next: GNU Free Documentation License, Prev: Reporting Bugs, Up: Top 6262 6263 Appendix A MRI Compatible Script Files 6264 ************************************** 6265 6266 To aid users making the transition to GNU `ld' from the MRI linker, 6267 `ld' can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an alternative to the 6268 more general-purpose linker scripting language described in *Note 6269 Scripts::. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much simpler command 6270 set than the scripting language otherwise used with `ld'. GNU `ld' 6271 supports the most commonly used MRI linker commands; these commands are 6272 described here. 6273 6274 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the `a.out' object 6275 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some 6276 features to make use of them. 6277 6278 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the 6279 `-c' command-line option. 6280 6281 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each 6282 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though 6283 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an 6284 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, `ld' issues 6285 a warning message, but continues processing the script. 6286 6287 Lines beginning with `*' are comments. 6288 6289 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all 6290 lower case; for example, `chip' is the same as `CHIP'. The following 6291 list shows only the upper-case form of each command. 6292 6293 `ABSOLUTE SECNAME' 6294 `ABSOLUTE SECNAME, SECNAME, ... SECNAME' 6295 Normally, `ld' includes in the output file all sections from all 6296 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can 6297 use the `ABSOLUTE' command to restrict the sections that will be 6298 present in your output program. If the `ABSOLUTE' command is used 6299 at all in a script, then only the sections named explicitly in 6300 `ABSOLUTE' commands will appear in the linker output. You can 6301 still use other input sections (whatever you select on the command 6302 line, or using `LOAD') to resolve addresses in the output file. 6303 6304 `ALIAS OUT-SECNAME, IN-SECNAME' 6305 Use this command to place the data from input section IN-SECNAME 6306 in a section called OUT-SECNAME in the linker output file. 6307 6308 IN-SECNAME may be an integer. 6309 6310 `ALIGN SECNAME = EXPRESSION' 6311 Align the section called SECNAME to EXPRESSION. The EXPRESSION 6312 should be a power of two. 6313 6314 `BASE EXPRESSION' 6315 Use the value of EXPRESSION as the lowest address (other than 6316 absolute addresses) in the output file. 6317 6318 `CHIP EXPRESSION' 6319 `CHIP EXPRESSION, EXPRESSION' 6320 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility. 6321 6322 `END' 6323 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for 6324 compatibility. 6325 6326 `FORMAT OUTPUT-FORMAT' 6327 Similar to the `OUTPUT_FORMAT' command in the more general linker 6328 language, but restricted to one of these output formats: 6329 6330 1. S-records, if OUTPUT-FORMAT is `S' 6331 6332 2. IEEE, if OUTPUT-FORMAT is `IEEE' 6333 6334 3. COFF (the `coff-m68k' variant in BFD), if OUTPUT-FORMAT is 6335 `COFF' 6336 6337 `LIST ANYTHING...' 6338 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the 6339 `ld' command-line option `-M'. 6340 6341 The keyword `LIST' may be followed by anything on the same line, 6342 with no change in its effect. 6343 6344 `LOAD FILENAME' 6345 `LOAD FILENAME, FILENAME, ... FILENAME' 6346 Include one or more object file FILENAME in the link; this has the 6347 same effect as specifying FILENAME directly on the `ld' command 6348 line. 6349 6350 `NAME OUTPUT-NAME' 6351 OUTPUT-NAME is the name for the program produced by `ld'; the 6352 MRI-compatible command `NAME' is equivalent to the command-line 6353 option `-o' or the general script language command `OUTPUT'. 6354 6355 `ORDER SECNAME, SECNAME, ... SECNAME' 6356 `ORDER SECNAME SECNAME SECNAME' 6357 Normally, `ld' orders the sections in its output file in the order 6358 in which they first appear in the input files. In an 6359 MRI-compatible script, you can override this ordering with the 6360 `ORDER' command. The sections you list with `ORDER' will appear 6361 first in your output file, in the order specified. 6362 6363 `PUBLIC NAME=EXPRESSION' 6364 `PUBLIC NAME,EXPRESSION' 6365 `PUBLIC NAME EXPRESSION' 6366 Supply a value (EXPRESSION) for external symbol NAME used in the 6367 linker input files. 6368 6369 `SECT SECNAME, EXPRESSION' 6370 `SECT SECNAME=EXPRESSION' 6371 `SECT SECNAME EXPRESSION' 6372 You can use any of these three forms of the `SECT' command to 6373 specify the start address (EXPRESSION) for section SECNAME. If 6374 you have more than one `SECT' statement for the same SECNAME, only 6375 the _first_ sets the start address. 6376 6377 6378 File: ld.info, Node: GNU Free Documentation License, Next: LD Index, Prev: MRI, Up: Top 6379 6380 Appendix B GNU Free Documentation License 6381 ***************************************** 6382 6383 Version 1.1, March 2000 6384 6385 Copyright (C) 2000, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 6386 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA 6387 6388 Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies 6389 of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. 6390 6391 6392 0. PREAMBLE 6393 6394 The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other 6395 written document "free" in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone 6396 the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without 6397 modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, 6398 this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get 6399 credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for 6400 modifications made by others. 6401 6402 This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative 6403 works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. 6404 It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft 6405 license designed for free software. 6406 6407 We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for 6408 free software, because free software needs free documentation: a 6409 free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms 6410 that the software does. But this License is not limited to 6411 software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless 6412 of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book. 6413 We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is 6414 instruction or reference. 6415 6416 6417 1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS 6418 6419 This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a 6420 notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed 6421 under the terms of this License. The "Document", below, refers to 6422 any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, 6423 and is addressed as "you." 6424 6425 A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the 6426 Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with 6427 modifications and/or translated into another language. 6428 6429 A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter 6430 section of the Document that deals exclusively with the 6431 relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the 6432 Document's overall subject (or to related matters) and contains 6433 nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. 6434 (For example, if the Document is in part a textbook of 6435 mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) 6436 The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with 6437 the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial, 6438 philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them. 6439 6440 The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose 6441 titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in 6442 the notice that says that the Document is released under this 6443 License. 6444 6445 The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are 6446 listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice 6447 that says that the Document is released under this License. 6448 6449 A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy, 6450 represented in a format whose specification is available to the 6451 general public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly 6452 and straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images 6453 composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some 6454 widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to 6455 text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of 6456 formats suitable for input to text formatters. A copy made in an 6457 otherwise Transparent file format whose markup has been designed 6458 to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not 6459 Transparent. A copy that is not "Transparent" is called "Opaque." 6460 6461 Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain 6462 ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, 6463 SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and 6464 standard-conforming simple HTML designed for human modification. 6465 Opaque formats include PostScript, PDF, proprietary formats that 6466 can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML 6467 or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally 6468 available, and the machine-generated HTML produced by some word 6469 processors for output purposes only. 6470 6471 The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself, 6472 plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the 6473 material this License requires to appear in the title page. For 6474 works in formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title 6475 Page" means the text near the most prominent appearance of the 6476 work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text. 6477 6478 2. VERBATIM COPYING 6479 6480 You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either 6481 commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the 6482 copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License 6483 applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you 6484 add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You 6485 may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading 6486 or further copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, 6487 you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If you 6488 distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow 6489 the conditions in section 3. 6490 6491 You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, 6492 and you may publicly display copies. 6493 6494 3. COPYING IN QUANTITY 6495 6496 If you publish printed copies of the Document numbering more than 6497 100, and the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you 6498 must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, 6499 all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and 6500 Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both covers must also clearly 6501 and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies. The 6502 front cover must present the full title with all words of the 6503 title equally prominent and visible. You may add other material 6504 on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the 6505 covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and 6506 satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in 6507 other respects. 6508 6509 If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit 6510 legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit 6511 reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto 6512 adjacent pages. 6513 6514 If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document 6515 numbering more than 100, you must either include a 6516 machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or 6517 state in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-accessible 6518 computer-network location containing a complete Transparent copy 6519 of the Document, free of added material, which the general 6520 network-using public has access to download anonymously at no 6521 charge using public-standard network protocols. If you use the 6522 latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you 6523 begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that 6524 this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated 6525 location until at least one year after the last time you 6526 distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or 6527 retailers) of that edition to the public. 6528 6529 It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of 6530 the Document well before redistributing any large number of 6531 copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated 6532 version of the Document. 6533 6534 4. MODIFICATIONS 6535 6536 You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document 6537 under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you 6538 release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with 6539 the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus 6540 licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to 6541 whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you must do these 6542 things in the Modified Version: 6543 6544 A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title 6545 distinct from that of the Document, and from those of previous 6546 versions (which should, if there were any, be listed in the 6547 History section of the Document). You may use the same title 6548 as a previous version if the original publisher of that version 6549 gives permission. 6550 B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or 6551 entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in the 6552 Modified Version, together with at least five of the principal 6553 authors of the Document (all of its principal authors, if it 6554 has less than five). 6555 C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the 6556 Modified Version, as the publisher. 6557 D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document. 6558 E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications 6559 adjacent to the other copyright notices. 6560 F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license 6561 notice giving the public permission to use the Modified Version 6562 under the terms of this License, in the form shown in the 6563 Addendum below. 6564 G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant 6565 Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document's 6566 license notice. 6567 H. Include an unaltered copy of this License. 6568 I. Preserve the section entitled "History", and its title, and add 6569 to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and 6570 publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page. 6571 If there is no section entitled "History" in the Document, 6572 create one stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of 6573 the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item 6574 describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous 6575 sentence. 6576 J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for 6577 public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and 6578 likewise the network locations given in the Document for 6579 previous versions it was based on. These may be placed in the 6580 "History" section. You may omit a network location for a work 6581 that was published at least four years before the Document 6582 itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers 6583 to gives permission. 6584 K. In any section entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications", 6585 preserve the section's title, and preserve in the section all the 6586 substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements 6587 and/or dedications given therein. 6588 L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document, 6589 unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers 6590 or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles. 6591 M. Delete any section entitled "Endorsements." Such a section 6592 may not be included in the Modified Version. 6593 N. Do not retitle any existing section as "Endorsements" or to 6594 conflict in title with any Invariant Section. 6595 6596 If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or 6597 appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no 6598 material copied from the Document, you may at your option 6599 designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this, 6600 add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified 6601 Version's license notice. These titles must be distinct from any 6602 other section titles. 6603 6604 You may add a section entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains 6605 nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various 6606 parties-for example, statements of peer review or that the text has 6607 been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition 6608 of a standard. 6609 6610 You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, 6611 and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end 6612 of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one 6613 passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be 6614 added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the 6615 Document already includes a cover text for the same cover, 6616 previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity 6617 you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may 6618 replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous 6619 publisher that added the old one. 6620 6621 The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this 6622 License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to 6623 assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version. 6624 6625 5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS 6626 6627 You may combine the Document with other documents released under 6628 this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for 6629 modified versions, provided that you include in the combination 6630 all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, 6631 unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your 6632 combined work in its license notice. 6633 6634 The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and 6635 multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single 6636 copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name 6637 but different contents, make the title of each such section unique 6638 by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the 6639 original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a 6640 unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in 6641 the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the 6642 combined work. 6643 6644 In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled 6645 "History" in the various original documents, forming one section 6646 entitled "History"; likewise combine any sections entitled 6647 "Acknowledgements", and any sections entitled "Dedications." You 6648 must delete all sections entitled "Endorsements." 6649 6650 6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS 6651 6652 You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other 6653 documents released under this License, and replace the individual 6654 copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy 6655 that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the 6656 rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the 6657 documents in all other respects. 6658 6659 You may extract a single document from such a collection, and 6660 distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert 6661 a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow 6662 this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of 6663 that document. 6664 6665 7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS 6666 6667 A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other 6668 separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of 6669 a storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a 6670 Modified Version of the Document, provided no compilation 6671 copyright is claimed for the compilation. Such a compilation is 6672 called an "aggregate", and this License does not apply to the 6673 other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document, on 6674 account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves 6675 derivative works of the Document. 6676 6677 If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these 6678 copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one 6679 quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be 6680 placed on covers that surround only the Document within the 6681 aggregate. Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole 6682 aggregate. 6683 6684 8. TRANSLATION 6685 6686 Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may 6687 distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 6688 4. Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special 6689 permission from their copyright holders, but you may include 6690 translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the 6691 original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a 6692 translation of this License provided that you also include the 6693 original English version of this License. In case of a 6694 disagreement between the translation and the original English 6695 version of this License, the original English version will prevail. 6696 6697 9. TERMINATION 6698 6699 You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document 6700 except as expressly provided for under this License. Any other 6701 attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is 6702 void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this 6703 License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, 6704 from you under this License will not have their licenses 6705 terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 6706 6707 10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE 6708 6709 The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of 6710 the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new 6711 versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may 6712 differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See 6713 http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/. 6714 6715 Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version 6716 number. If the Document specifies that a particular numbered 6717 version of this License "or any later version" applies to it, you 6718 have the option of following the terms and conditions either of 6719 that specified version or of any later version that has been 6720 published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If 6721 the Document does not specify a version number of this License, 6722 you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the 6723 Free Software Foundation. 6724 6725 6726 ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents 6727 ==================================================== 6728 6729 To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of 6730 the License in the document and put the following copyright and license 6731 notices just after the title page: 6732 6733 Copyright (C) YEAR YOUR NAME. 6734 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document 6735 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 6736 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; 6737 with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the 6738 Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST. 6739 A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU 6740 Free Documentation License." 6741 6742 If you have no Invariant Sections, write "with no Invariant Sections" 6743 instead of saying which ones are invariant. If you have no Front-Cover 6744 Texts, write "no Front-Cover Texts" instead of "Front-Cover Texts being 6745 LIST"; likewise for Back-Cover Texts. 6746 6747 If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we 6748 recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of 6749 free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to 6750 permit their use in free software. 6751 6752 6753 File: ld.info, Node: LD Index, Prev: GNU Free Documentation License, Up: Top 6754 6755 LD Index 6756 ******** 6757 6758 [index] 6759 * Menu: 6760 6761 * ": Symbols. (line 6) 6762 * -(: Options. (line 675) 6763 * --accept-unknown-input-arch: Options. (line 693) 6764 * --add-needed: Options. (line 717) 6765 * --add-stdcall-alias: Options. (line 1527) 6766 * --allow-multiple-definition: Options. (line 945) 6767 * --allow-shlib-undefined: Options. (line 951) 6768 * --architecture=ARCH: Options. (line 113) 6769 * --as-needed: Options. (line 703) 6770 * --auxiliary=NAME: Options. (line 235) 6771 * --bank-window: Options. (line 1926) 6772 * --base-file: Options. (line 1532) 6773 * --be8: ARM. (line 28) 6774 * --bss-plt: PowerPC ELF32. (line 16) 6775 * --build-id: Options. (line 1489) 6776 * --build-id=STYLE: Options. (line 1489) 6777 * --check-sections: Options. (line 799) 6778 * --cref: Options. (line 811) 6779 * --default-imported-symver: Options. (line 988) 6780 * --default-script=SCRIPT: Options. (line 520) 6781 * --default-symver: Options. (line 984) 6782 * --defsym=SYMBOL=EXP: Options. (line 839) 6783 * --demangle[=STYLE]: Options. (line 852) 6784 * --disable-auto-image-base: Options. (line 1701) 6785 * --disable-auto-import: Options. (line 1836) 6786 * --disable-long-section-names: Options. (line 1542) 6787 * --disable-new-dtags: Options. (line 1452) 6788 * --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc: Options. (line 1849) 6789 * --disable-stdcall-fixup: Options. (line 1564) 6790 * --discard-all: Options. (line 566) 6791 * --discard-locals: Options. (line 570) 6792 * --dll: Options. (line 1537) 6793 * --dll-search-prefix: Options. (line 1707) 6794 * --dotsyms: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 33) 6795 * --dynamic-linker=FILE: Options. (line 865) 6796 * --dynamic-list-cpp-new: Options. (line 791) 6797 * --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo: Options. (line 795) 6798 * --dynamic-list-data: Options. (line 788) 6799 * --dynamic-list=DYNAMIC-LIST-FILE: Options. (line 775) 6800 * --dynamicbase: Options. (line 1885) 6801 * --eh-frame-hdr: Options. (line 1448) 6802 * --emit-relocs: Options. (line 455) 6803 * --emit-stack-syms: SPU ELF. (line 46) 6804 * --emit-stub-syms <1>: PowerPC ELF32. (line 47) 6805 * --emit-stub-syms <2>: SPU ELF. (line 15) 6806 * --emit-stub-syms: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 29) 6807 * --enable-auto-image-base: Options. (line 1693) 6808 * --enable-auto-import: Options. (line 1716) 6809 * --enable-extra-pe-debug: Options. (line 1854) 6810 * --enable-long-section-names: Options. (line 1542) 6811 * --enable-new-dtags: Options. (line 1452) 6812 * --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc: Options. (line 1841) 6813 * --enable-stdcall-fixup: Options. (line 1564) 6814 * --entry=ENTRY: Options. (line 167) 6815 * --error-unresolved-symbols: Options. (line 1401) 6816 * --exclude-libs: Options. (line 177) 6817 * --exclude-modules-for-implib: Options. (line 188) 6818 * --exclude-symbols: Options. (line 1606) 6819 * --export-all-symbols: Options. (line 1582) 6820 * --export-dynamic: Options. (line 201) 6821 * --extra-overlay-stubs: SPU ELF. (line 19) 6822 * --fatal-warnings: Options. (line 872) 6823 * --file-alignment: Options. (line 1612) 6824 * --filter=NAME: Options. (line 256) 6825 * --fix-cortex-a8: i960. (line 39) 6826 * --fix-v4bx: ARM. (line 49) 6827 * --fix-v4bx-interworking: ARM. (line 62) 6828 * --force-dynamic: Options. (line 464) 6829 * --force-exe-suffix: Options. (line 877) 6830 * --forceinteg: Options. (line 1890) 6831 * --format=FORMAT: Options. (line 124) 6832 * --format=VERSION: TI COFF. (line 6) 6833 * --gc-sections: Options. (line 887) 6834 * --got: Options. (line 1939) 6835 * --got=TYPE: M68K. (line 6) 6836 * --gpsize=VALUE: Options. (line 289) 6837 * --hash-size=NUMBER: Options. (line 1461) 6838 * --hash-style=STYLE: Options. (line 1469) 6839 * --heap: Options. (line 1618) 6840 * --help: Options. (line 918) 6841 * --image-base: Options. (line 1625) 6842 * --just-symbols=FILE: Options. (line 487) 6843 * --kill-at: Options. (line 1634) 6844 * --large-address-aware: Options. (line 1639) 6845 * --library-path=DIR: Options. (line 348) 6846 * --library=NAMESPEC: Options. (line 315) 6847 * --local-store=lo:hi: SPU ELF. (line 24) 6848 * --major-image-version: Options. (line 1648) 6849 * --major-os-version: Options. (line 1653) 6850 * --major-subsystem-version: Options. (line 1657) 6851 * --minor-image-version: Options. (line 1662) 6852 * --minor-os-version: Options. (line 1667) 6853 * --minor-subsystem-version: Options. (line 1671) 6854 * --mri-script=MRI-CMDFILE: Options. (line 148) 6855 * --multi-subspace: HPPA ELF32. (line 6) 6856 * --nmagic: Options. (line 419) 6857 * --no-accept-unknown-input-arch: Options. (line 693) 6858 * --no-add-needed: Options. (line 717) 6859 * --no-allow-shlib-undefined: Options. (line 951) 6860 * --no-as-needed: Options. (line 703) 6861 * --no-bind: Options. (line 1904) 6862 * --no-check-sections: Options. (line 799) 6863 * --no-define-common: Options. (line 823) 6864 * --no-demangle: Options. (line 852) 6865 * --no-dotsyms: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 33) 6866 * --no-enum-size-warning: ARM. (line 111) 6867 * --no-export-dynamic: Options. (line 201) 6868 * --no-fatal-warnings: Options. (line 872) 6869 * --no-fix-cortex-a8: i960. (line 39) 6870 * --no-gc-sections: Options. (line 887) 6871 * --no-isolation: Options. (line 1897) 6872 * --no-keep-memory: Options. (line 930) 6873 * --no-multi-toc: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 74) 6874 * --no-omagic: Options. (line 433) 6875 * --no-opd-optimize: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 48) 6876 * --no-overlays: SPU ELF. (line 9) 6877 * --no-print-gc-sections: Options. (line 909) 6878 * --no-relax: Xtensa. (line 56) 6879 * --no-seh: Options. (line 1900) 6880 * --no-tls-optimize <1>: PowerPC ELF32. (line 51) 6881 * --no-tls-optimize: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 43) 6882 * --no-toc-optimize: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 60) 6883 * --no-trampoline: Options. (line 1920) 6884 * --no-undefined: Options. (line 937) 6885 * --no-undefined-version: Options. (line 979) 6886 * --no-warn-mismatch: Options. (line 992) 6887 * --no-warn-search-mismatch: Options. (line 1001) 6888 * --no-wchar-size-warning: ARM. (line 118) 6889 * --no-whole-archive: Options. (line 1005) 6890 * --noinhibit-exec: Options. (line 1009) 6891 * --non-overlapping-opd: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 54) 6892 * --nxcompat: Options. (line 1893) 6893 * --oformat=OUTPUT-FORMAT: Options. (line 1021) 6894 * --omagic: Options. (line 424) 6895 * --out-implib: Options. (line 1684) 6896 * --output-def: Options. (line 1676) 6897 * --output=OUTPUT: Options. (line 439) 6898 * --pic-executable: Options. (line 1034) 6899 * --pic-veneer: ARM. (line 124) 6900 * --plugin: SPU ELF. (line 6) 6901 * --print-gc-sections: Options. (line 909) 6902 * --print-map: Options. (line 382) 6903 * --reduce-memory-overheads: Options. (line 1475) 6904 * --relax: Options. (line 1050) 6905 * --relax on i960: i960. (line 31) 6906 * --relax on PowerPC: PowerPC ELF32. (line 6) 6907 * --relax on Xtensa: Xtensa. (line 27) 6908 * --relocatable: Options. (line 468) 6909 * --retain-symbols-file=FILENAME: Options. (line 1071) 6910 * --script=SCRIPT: Options. (line 511) 6911 * --sdata-got: PowerPC ELF32. (line 33) 6912 * --section-alignment: Options. (line 1859) 6913 * --section-start=SECTIONNAME=ORG: Options. (line 1227) 6914 * --secure-plt: PowerPC ELF32. (line 26) 6915 * --sort-common: Options. (line 1169) 6916 * --sort-section=alignment: Options. (line 1184) 6917 * --sort-section=name: Options. (line 1180) 6918 * --split-by-file: Options. (line 1188) 6919 * --split-by-reloc: Options. (line 1193) 6920 * --stack: Options. (line 1865) 6921 * --stack-analysis: SPU ELF. (line 29) 6922 * --stats: Options. (line 1206) 6923 * --strip-all: Options. (line 498) 6924 * --strip-debug: Options. (line 502) 6925 * --stub-group-size: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 6) 6926 * --stub-group-size=N <1>: ARM. (line 129) 6927 * --stub-group-size=N: HPPA ELF32. (line 12) 6928 * --subsystem: Options. (line 1872) 6929 * --support-old-code: ARM. (line 6) 6930 * --sysroot=DIRECTORY: Options. (line 1210) 6931 * --target-help: Options. (line 922) 6932 * --target1-abs: ARM. (line 32) 6933 * --target1-rel: ARM. (line 32) 6934 * --target2=TYPE: ARM. (line 37) 6935 * --thumb-entry=ENTRY: ARM. (line 17) 6936 * --trace: Options. (line 507) 6937 * --trace-symbol=SYMBOL: Options. (line 576) 6938 * --traditional-format: Options. (line 1215) 6939 * --tsaware: Options. (line 1910) 6940 * --undefined=SYMBOL: Options. (line 533) 6941 * --unique[=SECTION]: Options. (line 551) 6942 * --unresolved-symbols: Options. (line 1246) 6943 * --use-blx: ARM. (line 74) 6944 * --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables: ARM. (line 23) 6945 * --verbose: Options. (line 1275) 6946 * --version: Options. (line 560) 6947 * --version-script=VERSION-SCRIPTFILE: Options. (line 1281) 6948 * --vfp11-denorm-fix: ARM. (line 83) 6949 * --warn-alternate-em: Options. (line 1393) 6950 * --warn-common: Options. (line 1292) 6951 * --warn-constructors: Options. (line 1360) 6952 * --warn-multiple-gp: Options. (line 1365) 6953 * --warn-once: Options. (line 1379) 6954 * --warn-section-align: Options. (line 1383) 6955 * --warn-shared-textrel: Options. (line 1390) 6956 * --warn-unresolved-symbols: Options. (line 1396) 6957 * --wdmdriver: Options. (line 1907) 6958 * --whole-archive: Options. (line 1405) 6959 * --wrap=SYMBOL: Options. (line 1419) 6960 * -A ARCH: Options. (line 112) 6961 * -a KEYWORD: Options. (line 105) 6962 * -assert KEYWORD: Options. (line 727) 6963 * -b FORMAT: Options. (line 124) 6964 * -Bdynamic: Options. (line 730) 6965 * -Bgroup: Options. (line 740) 6966 * -Bshareable: Options. (line 1162) 6967 * -Bstatic: Options. (line 747) 6968 * -Bsymbolic: Options. (line 762) 6969 * -Bsymbolic-functions: Options. (line 769) 6970 * -c MRI-CMDFILE: Options. (line 148) 6971 * -call_shared: Options. (line 730) 6972 * -d: Options. (line 158) 6973 * -dc: Options. (line 158) 6974 * -dn: Options. (line 747) 6975 * -dp: Options. (line 158) 6976 * -dT SCRIPT: Options. (line 520) 6977 * -dy: Options. (line 730) 6978 * -E: Options. (line 201) 6979 * -e ENTRY: Options. (line 167) 6980 * -EB: Options. (line 228) 6981 * -EL: Options. (line 231) 6982 * -F NAME: Options. (line 256) 6983 * -f NAME: Options. (line 235) 6984 * -fini=NAME: Options. (line 280) 6985 * -g: Options. (line 286) 6986 * -G VALUE: Options. (line 289) 6987 * -h NAME: Options. (line 297) 6988 * -i: Options. (line 306) 6989 * -IFILE: Options. (line 865) 6990 * -init=NAME: Options. (line 309) 6991 * -L DIR: Options. (line 348) 6992 * -l NAMESPEC: Options. (line 315) 6993 * -M: Options. (line 382) 6994 * -m EMULATION: Options. (line 372) 6995 * -Map=MAPFILE: Options. (line 926) 6996 * -N: Options. (line 424) 6997 * -n: Options. (line 419) 6998 * -non_shared: Options. (line 747) 6999 * -nostdlib: Options. (line 1015) 7000 * -O LEVEL: Options. (line 445) 7001 * -o OUTPUT: Options. (line 439) 7002 * -pie: Options. (line 1034) 7003 * -q: Options. (line 455) 7004 * -qmagic: Options. (line 1044) 7005 * -Qy: Options. (line 1047) 7006 * -r: Options. (line 468) 7007 * -R FILE: Options. (line 487) 7008 * -rpath-link=DIR: Options. (line 1107) 7009 * -rpath=DIR: Options. (line 1085) 7010 * -s: Options. (line 498) 7011 * -S: Options. (line 502) 7012 * -shared: Options. (line 1162) 7013 * -soname=NAME: Options. (line 297) 7014 * -static: Options. (line 747) 7015 * -t: Options. (line 507) 7016 * -T SCRIPT: Options. (line 511) 7017 * -Tbss=ORG: Options. (line 1236) 7018 * -Tdata=ORG: Options. (line 1236) 7019 * -Ttext-segment=ORG: Options. (line 1242) 7020 * -Ttext=ORG: Options. (line 1236) 7021 * -u SYMBOL: Options. (line 533) 7022 * -Ur: Options. (line 541) 7023 * -V: Options. (line 560) 7024 * -v: Options. (line 560) 7025 * -X: Options. (line 570) 7026 * -x: Options. (line 566) 7027 * -Y PATH: Options. (line 585) 7028 * -y SYMBOL: Options. (line 576) 7029 * -z defs: Options. (line 937) 7030 * -z KEYWORD: Options. (line 589) 7031 * -z muldefs: Options. (line 945) 7032 * .: Location Counter. (line 6) 7033 * /DISCARD/: Output Section Discarding. 7034 (line 21) 7035 * :PHDR: Output Section Phdr. 7036 (line 6) 7037 * =FILLEXP: Output Section Fill. 7038 (line 6) 7039 * >REGION: Output Section Region. 7040 (line 6) 7041 * [COMMON]: Input Section Common. 7042 (line 29) 7043 * ABSOLUTE (MRI): MRI. (line 33) 7044 * absolute and relocatable symbols: Expression Section. (line 6) 7045 * absolute expressions: Expression Section. (line 6) 7046 * ABSOLUTE(EXP): Builtin Functions. (line 10) 7047 * ADDR(SECTION): Builtin Functions. (line 17) 7048 * address, section: Output Section Address. 7049 (line 6) 7050 * ALIAS (MRI): MRI. (line 44) 7051 * ALIGN (MRI): MRI. (line 50) 7052 * align expression: Builtin Functions. (line 36) 7053 * align location counter: Builtin Functions. (line 36) 7054 * ALIGN(ALIGN): Builtin Functions. (line 36) 7055 * ALIGN(EXP,ALIGN): Builtin Functions. (line 36) 7056 * ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN): Forced Output Alignment. 7057 (line 6) 7058 * aligned common symbols: WIN32. (line 418) 7059 * ALIGNOF(SECTION): Builtin Functions. (line 62) 7060 * allocating memory: MEMORY. (line 6) 7061 * architecture: Miscellaneous Commands. 7062 (line 72) 7063 * architectures: Options. (line 112) 7064 * archive files, from cmd line: Options. (line 315) 7065 * archive search path in linker script: File Commands. (line 74) 7066 * arithmetic: Expressions. (line 6) 7067 * arithmetic operators: Operators. (line 6) 7068 * ARM interworking support: ARM. (line 6) 7069 * AS_NEEDED(FILES): File Commands. (line 54) 7070 * ASSERT: Miscellaneous Commands. 7071 (line 9) 7072 * assertion in linker script: Miscellaneous Commands. 7073 (line 9) 7074 * assignment in scripts: Assignments. (line 6) 7075 * AT(LMA): Output Section LMA. (line 6) 7076 * AT>LMA_REGION: Output Section LMA. (line 6) 7077 * automatic data imports: WIN32. (line 185) 7078 * back end: BFD. (line 6) 7079 * BASE (MRI): MRI. (line 54) 7080 * BE8: ARM. (line 28) 7081 * BFD canonical format: Canonical format. (line 11) 7082 * BFD requirements: BFD. (line 16) 7083 * big-endian objects: Options. (line 228) 7084 * binary input format: Options. (line 124) 7085 * BLOCK(EXP): Builtin Functions. (line 75) 7086 * bug criteria: Bug Criteria. (line 6) 7087 * bug reports: Bug Reporting. (line 6) 7088 * bugs in ld: Reporting Bugs. (line 6) 7089 * BYTE(EXPRESSION): Output Section Data. 7090 (line 6) 7091 * C++ constructors, arranging in link: Output Section Keywords. 7092 (line 19) 7093 * CHIP (MRI): MRI. (line 58) 7094 * COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE: Environment. (line 29) 7095 * combining symbols, warnings on: Options. (line 1292) 7096 * command files: Scripts. (line 6) 7097 * command line: Options. (line 6) 7098 * common allocation: Options. (line 158) 7099 * common allocation in linker script: Miscellaneous Commands. 7100 (line 20) 7101 * common symbol placement: Input Section Common. 7102 (line 6) 7103 * COMMONPAGESIZE: Symbolic Constants. (line 13) 7104 * compatibility, MRI: Options. (line 148) 7105 * CONSTANT: Symbolic Constants. (line 6) 7106 * constants in linker scripts: Constants. (line 6) 7107 * constraints on output sections: Output Section Constraint. 7108 (line 6) 7109 * CONSTRUCTORS: Output Section Keywords. 7110 (line 19) 7111 * constructors: Options. (line 541) 7112 * constructors, arranging in link: Output Section Keywords. 7113 (line 19) 7114 * Cortex-A8 erratum workaround: i960. (line 39) 7115 * crash of linker: Bug Criteria. (line 9) 7116 * CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS: Output Section Keywords. 7117 (line 9) 7118 * creating a DEF file: WIN32. (line 152) 7119 * cross reference table: Options. (line 811) 7120 * cross references: Miscellaneous Commands. 7121 (line 56) 7122 * current output location: Location Counter. (line 6) 7123 * data: Output Section Data. 7124 (line 6) 7125 * DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE, COMMONPAGESIZE): Builtin Functions. 7126 (line 80) 7127 * DATA_SEGMENT_END(EXP): Builtin Functions. (line 101) 7128 * DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(OFFSET, EXP): Builtin Functions. (line 107) 7129 * dbx: Options. (line 1220) 7130 * DEF files, creating: Options. (line 1676) 7131 * default emulation: Environment. (line 21) 7132 * default input format: Environment. (line 9) 7133 * DEFINED(SYMBOL): Builtin Functions. (line 118) 7134 * deleting local symbols: Options. (line 566) 7135 * demangling, default: Environment. (line 29) 7136 * demangling, from command line: Options. (line 852) 7137 * direct linking to a dll: WIN32. (line 233) 7138 * discarding sections: Output Section Discarding. 7139 (line 6) 7140 * discontinuous memory: MEMORY. (line 6) 7141 * DLLs, creating: Options. (line 1676) 7142 * DLLs, linking to: Options. (line 1707) 7143 * dot: Location Counter. (line 6) 7144 * dot inside sections: Location Counter. (line 36) 7145 * dot outside sections: Location Counter. (line 66) 7146 * dynamic linker, from command line: Options. (line 865) 7147 * dynamic symbol table: Options. (line 201) 7148 * ELF program headers: PHDRS. (line 6) 7149 * emulation: Options. (line 372) 7150 * emulation, default: Environment. (line 21) 7151 * END (MRI): MRI. (line 62) 7152 * endianness: Options. (line 228) 7153 * entry point: Entry Point. (line 6) 7154 * entry point, from command line: Options. (line 167) 7155 * entry point, thumb: ARM. (line 17) 7156 * ENTRY(SYMBOL): Entry Point. (line 6) 7157 * error on valid input: Bug Criteria. (line 12) 7158 * example of linker script: Simple Example. (line 6) 7159 * exporting DLL symbols: WIN32. (line 19) 7160 * expression evaluation order: Evaluation. (line 6) 7161 * expression sections: Expression Section. (line 6) 7162 * expression, absolute: Builtin Functions. (line 10) 7163 * expressions: Expressions. (line 6) 7164 * EXTERN: Miscellaneous Commands. 7165 (line 13) 7166 * fatal signal: Bug Criteria. (line 9) 7167 * file name wildcard patterns: Input Section Wildcards. 7168 (line 6) 7169 * FILEHDR: PHDRS. (line 61) 7170 * filename symbols: Output Section Keywords. 7171 (line 9) 7172 * fill pattern, entire section: Output Section Fill. 7173 (line 6) 7174 * FILL(EXPRESSION): Output Section Data. 7175 (line 39) 7176 * finalization function: Options. (line 280) 7177 * first input file: File Commands. (line 82) 7178 * first instruction: Entry Point. (line 6) 7179 * FIX_V4BX: ARM. (line 49) 7180 * FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING: ARM. (line 62) 7181 * FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION: Miscellaneous Commands. 7182 (line 20) 7183 * forcing input section alignment: Forced Input Alignment. 7184 (line 6) 7185 * forcing output section alignment: Forced Output Alignment. 7186 (line 6) 7187 * forcing the creation of dynamic sections: Options. (line 464) 7188 * FORMAT (MRI): MRI. (line 66) 7189 * functions in expressions: Builtin Functions. (line 6) 7190 * garbage collection <1>: Options. (line 909) 7191 * garbage collection <2>: Input Section Keep. (line 6) 7192 * garbage collection: Options. (line 887) 7193 * generating optimized output: Options. (line 445) 7194 * GNU linker: Overview. (line 6) 7195 * GNUTARGET: Environment. (line 9) 7196 * GROUP(FILES): File Commands. (line 47) 7197 * grouping input files: File Commands. (line 47) 7198 * groups of archives: Options. (line 675) 7199 * H8/300 support: H8/300. (line 6) 7200 * header size: Builtin Functions. (line 183) 7201 * heap size: Options. (line 1618) 7202 * help: Options. (line 918) 7203 * holes: Location Counter. (line 12) 7204 * holes, filling: Output Section Data. 7205 (line 39) 7206 * HPPA multiple sub-space stubs: HPPA ELF32. (line 6) 7207 * HPPA stub grouping: HPPA ELF32. (line 12) 7208 * i960 support: i960. (line 6) 7209 * image base: Options. (line 1625) 7210 * implicit linker scripts: Implicit Linker Scripts. 7211 (line 6) 7212 * import libraries: WIN32. (line 10) 7213 * INCLUDE FILENAME: File Commands. (line 9) 7214 * including a linker script: File Commands. (line 9) 7215 * including an entire archive: Options. (line 1405) 7216 * incremental link: Options. (line 306) 7217 * INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION: Miscellaneous Commands. 7218 (line 25) 7219 * initialization function: Options. (line 309) 7220 * initialized data in ROM: Output Section LMA. (line 26) 7221 * input file format in linker script: Format Commands. (line 35) 7222 * input filename symbols: Output Section Keywords. 7223 (line 9) 7224 * input files in linker scripts: File Commands. (line 19) 7225 * input files, displaying: Options. (line 507) 7226 * input format: Options. (line 124) 7227 * input object files in linker scripts: File Commands. (line 19) 7228 * input section alignment: Forced Input Alignment. 7229 (line 6) 7230 * input section basics: Input Section Basics. 7231 (line 6) 7232 * input section wildcards: Input Section Wildcards. 7233 (line 6) 7234 * input sections: Input Section. (line 6) 7235 * INPUT(FILES): File Commands. (line 19) 7236 * INSERT: Miscellaneous Commands. 7237 (line 30) 7238 * insert user script into default script: Miscellaneous Commands. 7239 (line 30) 7240 * integer notation: Constants. (line 6) 7241 * integer suffixes: Constants. (line 15) 7242 * internal object-file format: Canonical format. (line 11) 7243 * invalid input: Bug Criteria. (line 14) 7244 * K and M integer suffixes: Constants. (line 15) 7245 * KEEP: Input Section Keep. (line 6) 7246 * l =: MEMORY. (line 74) 7247 * lazy evaluation: Evaluation. (line 6) 7248 * ld bugs, reporting: Bug Reporting. (line 6) 7249 * LDEMULATION: Environment. (line 21) 7250 * len =: MEMORY. (line 74) 7251 * LENGTH =: MEMORY. (line 74) 7252 * LENGTH(MEMORY): Builtin Functions. (line 135) 7253 * library search path in linker script: File Commands. (line 74) 7254 * link map: Options. (line 382) 7255 * link-time runtime library search path: Options. (line 1107) 7256 * linker crash: Bug Criteria. (line 9) 7257 * linker script concepts: Basic Script Concepts. 7258 (line 6) 7259 * linker script example: Simple Example. (line 6) 7260 * linker script file commands: File Commands. (line 6) 7261 * linker script format: Script Format. (line 6) 7262 * linker script input object files: File Commands. (line 19) 7263 * linker script simple commands: Simple Commands. (line 6) 7264 * linker scripts: Scripts. (line 6) 7265 * LIST (MRI): MRI. (line 77) 7266 * little-endian objects: Options. (line 231) 7267 * LOAD (MRI): MRI. (line 84) 7268 * load address: Output Section LMA. (line 6) 7269 * LOADADDR(SECTION): Builtin Functions. (line 138) 7270 * loading, preventing: Output Section Type. 7271 (line 22) 7272 * local symbols, deleting: Options. (line 570) 7273 * location counter: Location Counter. (line 6) 7274 * LONG(EXPRESSION): Output Section Data. 7275 (line 6) 7276 * M and K integer suffixes: Constants. (line 15) 7277 * M68HC11 and 68HC12 support: M68HC11/68HC12. (line 6) 7278 * machine architecture: Miscellaneous Commands. 7279 (line 72) 7280 * machine dependencies: Machine Dependent. (line 6) 7281 * mapping input sections to output sections: Input Section. (line 6) 7282 * MAX: Builtin Functions. (line 143) 7283 * MAXPAGESIZE: Symbolic Constants. (line 10) 7284 * MEMORY: MEMORY. (line 6) 7285 * memory region attributes: MEMORY. (line 34) 7286 * memory regions: MEMORY. (line 6) 7287 * memory regions and sections: Output Section Region. 7288 (line 6) 7289 * memory usage: Options. (line 930) 7290 * MIN: Builtin Functions. (line 146) 7291 * Motorola 68K GOT generation: M68K. (line 6) 7292 * MRI compatibility: MRI. (line 6) 7293 * MSP430 extra sections: MSP430. (line 11) 7294 * NAME (MRI): MRI. (line 90) 7295 * name, section: Output Section Name. 7296 (line 6) 7297 * names: Symbols. (line 6) 7298 * naming the output file: Options. (line 439) 7299 * NEXT(EXP): Builtin Functions. (line 150) 7300 * NMAGIC: Options. (line 419) 7301 * NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING: ARM. (line 111) 7302 * NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING: ARM. (line 118) 7303 * NOCROSSREFS(SECTIONS): Miscellaneous Commands. 7304 (line 56) 7305 * NOLOAD: Output Section Type. 7306 (line 22) 7307 * not enough room for program headers: Builtin Functions. (line 188) 7308 * o =: MEMORY. (line 69) 7309 * objdump -i: BFD. (line 6) 7310 * object file management: BFD. (line 6) 7311 * object files: Options. (line 29) 7312 * object formats available: BFD. (line 6) 7313 * object size: Options. (line 289) 7314 * OMAGIC: Options. (line 424) 7315 * ONLY_IF_RO: Output Section Constraint. 7316 (line 6) 7317 * ONLY_IF_RW: Output Section Constraint. 7318 (line 6) 7319 * opening object files: BFD outline. (line 6) 7320 * operators for arithmetic: Operators. (line 6) 7321 * options: Options. (line 6) 7322 * ORDER (MRI): MRI. (line 95) 7323 * org =: MEMORY. (line 69) 7324 * ORIGIN =: MEMORY. (line 69) 7325 * ORIGIN(MEMORY): Builtin Functions. (line 156) 7326 * orphan: Orphan Sections. (line 6) 7327 * output file after errors: Options. (line 1009) 7328 * output file format in linker script: Format Commands. (line 10) 7329 * output file name in linker script: File Commands. (line 64) 7330 * output section alignment: Forced Output Alignment. 7331 (line 6) 7332 * output section attributes: Output Section Attributes. 7333 (line 6) 7334 * output section data: Output Section Data. 7335 (line 6) 7336 * OUTPUT(FILENAME): File Commands. (line 64) 7337 * OUTPUT_ARCH(BFDARCH): Miscellaneous Commands. 7338 (line 72) 7339 * OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME): Format Commands. (line 10) 7340 * OVERLAY: Overlay Description. 7341 (line 6) 7342 * overlays: Overlay Description. 7343 (line 6) 7344 * partial link: Options. (line 468) 7345 * PE import table prefixing: ARM. (line 23) 7346 * PHDRS: PHDRS. (line 61) 7347 * PIC_VENEER: ARM. (line 124) 7348 * position independent executables: Options. (line 1036) 7349 * PowerPC ELF32 options: PowerPC ELF32. (line 16) 7350 * PowerPC GOT: PowerPC ELF32. (line 33) 7351 * PowerPC long branches: PowerPC ELF32. (line 6) 7352 * PowerPC PLT: PowerPC ELF32. (line 16) 7353 * PowerPC stub symbols: PowerPC ELF32. (line 47) 7354 * PowerPC TLS optimization: PowerPC ELF32. (line 51) 7355 * PowerPC64 dot symbols: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 33) 7356 * PowerPC64 ELF64 options: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 6) 7357 * PowerPC64 multi-TOC: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 74) 7358 * PowerPC64 OPD optimization: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 48) 7359 * PowerPC64 OPD spacing: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 54) 7360 * PowerPC64 stub grouping: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 6) 7361 * PowerPC64 stub symbols: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 29) 7362 * PowerPC64 TLS optimization: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 43) 7363 * PowerPC64 TOC optimization: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 60) 7364 * precedence in expressions: Operators. (line 6) 7365 * prevent unnecessary loading: Output Section Type. 7366 (line 22) 7367 * program headers: PHDRS. (line 6) 7368 * program headers and sections: Output Section Phdr. 7369 (line 6) 7370 * program headers, not enough room: Builtin Functions. (line 188) 7371 * program segments: PHDRS. (line 6) 7372 * PROVIDE: PROVIDE. (line 6) 7373 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN: PROVIDE_HIDDEN. (line 6) 7374 * PUBLIC (MRI): MRI. (line 103) 7375 * QUAD(EXPRESSION): Output Section Data. 7376 (line 6) 7377 * quoted symbol names: Symbols. (line 6) 7378 * read-only text: Options. (line 419) 7379 * read/write from cmd line: Options. (line 424) 7380 * region alias: REGION_ALIAS. (line 6) 7381 * region names: REGION_ALIAS. (line 6) 7382 * REGION_ALIAS(ALIAS, REGION): REGION_ALIAS. (line 6) 7383 * regions of memory: MEMORY. (line 6) 7384 * relative expressions: Expression Section. (line 6) 7385 * relaxing addressing modes: Options. (line 1050) 7386 * relaxing on H8/300: H8/300. (line 9) 7387 * relaxing on i960: i960. (line 31) 7388 * relaxing on M68HC11: M68HC11/68HC12. (line 12) 7389 * relaxing on Xtensa: Xtensa. (line 27) 7390 * relocatable and absolute symbols: Expression Section. (line 6) 7391 * relocatable output: Options. (line 468) 7392 * removing sections: Output Section Discarding. 7393 (line 6) 7394 * reporting bugs in ld: Reporting Bugs. (line 6) 7395 * requirements for BFD: BFD. (line 16) 7396 * retain relocations in final executable: Options. (line 455) 7397 * retaining specified symbols: Options. (line 1071) 7398 * ROM initialized data: Output Section LMA. (line 26) 7399 * round up expression: Builtin Functions. (line 36) 7400 * round up location counter: Builtin Functions. (line 36) 7401 * runtime library name: Options. (line 297) 7402 * runtime library search path: Options. (line 1085) 7403 * runtime pseudo-relocation: WIN32. (line 211) 7404 * scaled integers: Constants. (line 15) 7405 * scommon section: Input Section Common. 7406 (line 20) 7407 * script files: Options. (line 520) 7408 * scripts: Scripts. (line 6) 7409 * search directory, from cmd line: Options. (line 348) 7410 * search path in linker script: File Commands. (line 74) 7411 * SEARCH_DIR(PATH): File Commands. (line 74) 7412 * SECT (MRI): MRI. (line 109) 7413 * section address: Output Section Address. 7414 (line 6) 7415 * section address in expression: Builtin Functions. (line 17) 7416 * section alignment: Builtin Functions. (line 62) 7417 * section alignment, warnings on: Options. (line 1383) 7418 * section data: Output Section Data. 7419 (line 6) 7420 * section fill pattern: Output Section Fill. 7421 (line 6) 7422 * section load address: Output Section LMA. (line 6) 7423 * section load address in expression: Builtin Functions. (line 138) 7424 * section name: Output Section Name. 7425 (line 6) 7426 * section name wildcard patterns: Input Section Wildcards. 7427 (line 6) 7428 * section size: Builtin Functions. (line 167) 7429 * section, assigning to memory region: Output Section Region. 7430 (line 6) 7431 * section, assigning to program header: Output Section Phdr. 7432 (line 6) 7433 * SECTIONS: SECTIONS. (line 6) 7434 * sections, discarding: Output Section Discarding. 7435 (line 6) 7436 * segment origins, cmd line: Options. (line 1236) 7437 * SEGMENT_START(SEGMENT, DEFAULT): Builtin Functions. (line 159) 7438 * segments, ELF: PHDRS. (line 6) 7439 * shared libraries: Options. (line 1164) 7440 * SHORT(EXPRESSION): Output Section Data. 7441 (line 6) 7442 * SIZEOF(SECTION): Builtin Functions. (line 167) 7443 * SIZEOF_HEADERS: Builtin Functions. (line 183) 7444 * small common symbols: Input Section Common. 7445 (line 20) 7446 * SORT: Input Section Wildcards. 7447 (line 58) 7448 * SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT: Input Section Wildcards. 7449 (line 54) 7450 * SORT_BY_NAME: Input Section Wildcards. 7451 (line 46) 7452 * SPU: SPU ELF. (line 29) 7453 * SPU ELF options: SPU ELF. (line 6) 7454 * SPU extra overlay stubs: SPU ELF. (line 19) 7455 * SPU local store size: SPU ELF. (line 24) 7456 * SPU overlay stub symbols: SPU ELF. (line 15) 7457 * SPU overlays: SPU ELF. (line 9) 7458 * SPU plugins: SPU ELF. (line 6) 7459 * SQUAD(EXPRESSION): Output Section Data. 7460 (line 6) 7461 * stack size: Options. (line 1865) 7462 * standard Unix system: Options. (line 7) 7463 * start of execution: Entry Point. (line 6) 7464 * STARTUP(FILENAME): File Commands. (line 82) 7465 * strip all symbols: Options. (line 498) 7466 * strip debugger symbols: Options. (line 502) 7467 * stripping all but some symbols: Options. (line 1071) 7468 * STUB_GROUP_SIZE: ARM. (line 129) 7469 * SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN): Forced Input Alignment. 7470 (line 6) 7471 * suffixes for integers: Constants. (line 15) 7472 * symbol defaults: Builtin Functions. (line 118) 7473 * symbol definition, scripts: Assignments. (line 6) 7474 * symbol names: Symbols. (line 6) 7475 * symbol tracing: Options. (line 576) 7476 * symbol versions: VERSION. (line 6) 7477 * symbol-only input: Options. (line 487) 7478 * symbolic constants: Symbolic Constants. (line 6) 7479 * symbols, from command line: Options. (line 839) 7480 * symbols, relocatable and absolute: Expression Section. (line 6) 7481 * symbols, retaining selectively: Options. (line 1071) 7482 * synthesizing linker: Options. (line 1050) 7483 * synthesizing on H8/300: H8/300. (line 14) 7484 * TARGET(BFDNAME): Format Commands. (line 35) 7485 * TARGET1: ARM. (line 32) 7486 * TARGET2: ARM. (line 37) 7487 * text segment origin, cmd line: Options. (line 1243) 7488 * thumb entry point: ARM. (line 17) 7489 * TI COFF versions: TI COFF. (line 6) 7490 * traditional format: Options. (line 1215) 7491 * trampoline generation on M68HC11: M68HC11/68HC12. (line 31) 7492 * trampoline generation on M68HC12: M68HC11/68HC12. (line 31) 7493 * unallocated address, next: Builtin Functions. (line 150) 7494 * undefined symbol: Options. (line 533) 7495 * undefined symbol in linker script: Miscellaneous Commands. 7496 (line 13) 7497 * undefined symbols, warnings on: Options. (line 1379) 7498 * uninitialized data placement: Input Section Common. 7499 (line 6) 7500 * unspecified memory: Output Section Data. 7501 (line 39) 7502 * usage: Options. (line 918) 7503 * USE_BLX: ARM. (line 74) 7504 * using a DEF file: WIN32. (line 57) 7505 * using auto-export functionality: WIN32. (line 22) 7506 * Using decorations: WIN32. (line 156) 7507 * variables, defining: Assignments. (line 6) 7508 * verbose: Options. (line 1275) 7509 * version: Options. (line 560) 7510 * version script: VERSION. (line 6) 7511 * version script, symbol versions: Options. (line 1281) 7512 * VERSION {script text}: VERSION. (line 6) 7513 * versions of symbols: VERSION. (line 6) 7514 * VFP11_DENORM_FIX: ARM. (line 83) 7515 * warnings, on combining symbols: Options. (line 1292) 7516 * warnings, on section alignment: Options. (line 1383) 7517 * warnings, on undefined symbols: Options. (line 1379) 7518 * weak externals: WIN32. (line 401) 7519 * what is this?: Overview. (line 6) 7520 * wildcard file name patterns: Input Section Wildcards. 7521 (line 6) 7522 * Xtensa options: Xtensa. (line 56) 7523 * Xtensa processors: Xtensa. (line 6) 7524 7525 7526 7527 Tag Table: 7528 Node: Top759 7529 Node: Overview1542 7530 Node: Invocation2656 7531 Node: Options3064 7532 Node: Environment90607 7533 Node: Scripts92367 7534 Node: Basic Script Concepts94101 7535 Node: Script Format96808 7536 Node: Simple Example97671 7537 Node: Simple Commands100767 7538 Node: Entry Point101273 7539 Node: File Commands102032 7540 Node: Format Commands106033 7541 Node: REGION_ALIAS107989 7542 Node: Miscellaneous Commands112821 7543 Node: Assignments116197 7544 Node: Simple Assignments116688 7545 Node: PROVIDE118424 7546 Node: PROVIDE_HIDDEN119629 7547 Node: Source Code Reference119873 7548 Node: SECTIONS123453 7549 Node: Output Section Description125344 7550 Node: Output Section Name126431 7551 Node: Output Section Address127307 7552 Node: Input Section129027 7553 Node: Input Section Basics129828 7554 Node: Input Section Wildcards133046 7555 Node: Input Section Common137779 7556 Node: Input Section Keep139261 7557 Node: Input Section Example139751 7558 Node: Output Section Data140719 7559 Node: Output Section Keywords143496 7560 Node: Output Section Discarding147065 7561 Node: Output Section Attributes148246 7562 Node: Output Section Type149347 7563 Node: Output Section LMA150501 7564 Node: Forced Output Alignment153014 7565 Node: Forced Input Alignment153282 7566 Node: Output Section Constraint153671 7567 Node: Output Section Region154099 7568 Node: Output Section Phdr154532 7569 Node: Output Section Fill155196 7570 Node: Overlay Description156338 7571 Node: MEMORY160641 7572 Node: PHDRS164974 7573 Node: VERSION170013 7574 Node: Expressions178088 7575 Node: Constants179017 7576 Node: Symbolic Constants179892 7577 Node: Symbols180443 7578 Node: Orphan Sections181190 7579 Node: Location Counter182354 7580 Node: Operators186790 7581 Node: Evaluation187712 7582 Node: Expression Section189076 7583 Node: Builtin Functions190565 7584 Node: Implicit Linker Scripts198532 7585 Node: Machine Dependent199307 7586 Node: H8/300200323 7587 Node: i960201948 7588 Node: M68HC11/68HC12204049 7589 Node: ARM205503 7590 Node: HPPA ELF32213015 7591 Node: M68K214638 7592 Node: MMIX215547 7593 Node: MSP430216712 7594 Node: PowerPC ELF32217761 7595 Node: PowerPC64 ELF64220597 7596 Node: SPU ELF225013 7597 Node: TI COFF227645 7598 Node: WIN32228171 7599 Node: Xtensa247895 7600 Node: BFD251017 7601 Node: BFD outline252472 7602 Node: BFD information loss253758 7603 Node: Canonical format256275 7604 Node: Reporting Bugs260632 7605 Node: Bug Criteria261326 7606 Node: Bug Reporting262025 7607 Node: MRI269064 7608 Node: GNU Free Documentation License273707 7609 Node: LD Index293424 7610 7611 End Tag Table 7612